JP7334666B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means is provided, and when a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided in the internal area, the player There is known a pachinko machine that generates a special game state that is advantageous to players (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-11-197312

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machines, games tend to become monotonous, and further improvements in interest have been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter;
a special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball is entered in the special ball entry means, the gaming machine comprising:
a first trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter;
a second trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific region can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific region can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
It is possible to flow down to the special ball entry means by changing the state in the internal area of the variable ball entry means between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. a variable means capable of changing the value of the game ball flowing down a predetermined route,
The variable means, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means, a predetermined configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
This game machine is
When the predetermined switching condition is established, the value of the game ball flowing down the predetermined route is changed by the variable means,
The specific area is provided only at one location through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided only at one place,
In the specific area, while allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction, a regulation means is provided that regulates the passage of the game ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
A game ball that has entered the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball-entering means after that,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the special game state is granted by being controlled to the advantageous state by the variable means, the predetermined type of game most advantageous to the player is given, rather than being controlled to the non-advantageous state by the variable means. It has a structure that makes it easy to determine the special game state,
When the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the second trigger ball entering means, the variable The gist of this is that the device is configured to change the value of the game ball that has flowed down due to the action of the means.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to dramatically improve amusement.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, the game board, and the like. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time determination processing. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows entering ball count processing. It is a flow chart which shows a special winning a prize process. It is a flow chart which shows non-special prize-winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows a kind entry process. It is a flow chart which shows V prize big hit setting processing. 8 is a flowchart showing first display control processing; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination|determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows blade member opening and closing processing. 9 is a flowchart showing second display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize winning section control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing third display control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing bypass mechanism control processing; It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball monitoring process. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a front view of a central winning unit. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the route sorting member. It is an exploded perspective view showing a route distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view showing a rotating body unit. (a) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is housed, and (b) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a projecting state. (a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in an accommodated state and its related configuration, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a projected state and its related configuration. It is a front view for explaining a route distribution member etc. concerning another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional front view for explaining route distribution areas and the like according to another embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows a start winning a prize pre-process. It is a flow chart which shows the 4th display control processing.

An embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes its outer shell. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 is provided as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof. can be stored in Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

A performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15. - 特許庁When the player presses the effect button 125, a predetermined effect is performed on the effect display device 42 or the like, which will be described later, or the content of the effect is changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 protruding forward. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown), an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting an operation amount of an operation portion of the handle 18, and the like.

Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is shot by a shooting device 60 as a shooting means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Also, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. As shown in FIG. When the shooting prohibition button 18a is pressed, shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is gripped. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of the game ball, or temporarily stop shooting the game ball while gripping the handle 18.例文帳に追加

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60, which will be described later, while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 are provided on the upper plate 19. - 特許庁As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Furthermore, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123 . By pressing the ball extracting button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light-emitting means play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light-emitting mode such as lighting and blinking in accordance with the change of the game state at the time of a big win or a predetermined ready-to-win state.

For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 to light up in the event of a predetermined error. A large number of fine through-holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached after being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 and the like. At the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a shooting device 60 and a shooting rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being shot from the shooting device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 .

In this embodiment, control is performed such that launching of the launching device 60 is prohibited based on the game ball being continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the stagnation of the game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching of the shooting device 60 is permitted.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60 . The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving means such as a solenoid.

3 and 4, reference numeral 67 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19). and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like so as to close the outlet of the payout passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlet portions (ball inlet portions) of the lower tray communicating passage 71 and the upper tray communicating passage 73 and the dispensing passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. A game ball can pass through the gap. As a result, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be put out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side, pass through the lower tray communication path 71, and are paid out to the lower tray 15. It will happen.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached behind the window hole 39 to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30, which serves as a game area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. As shown in FIG.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 and guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 . The rail 50 may be a ball passage. As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Moreover, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail-constituting portion 52 . A game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the upper right portion of the game board 30 , and the inner rail component 51 ends at the lower right portion of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball preventing member 53 as a restricting means, it may flow backward on the rail 50. Excluded from the domain.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed leading to the plate 15 . The specific area may be the area where the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged. If a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 through the foul ball passage 72. .

In addition, the game board 30 includes a general winning section 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b) as a starting ball winning means, a through A gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as variable ball entry means, and the like are arranged in through holes formed by router processing and attached from the front side of the game board 30 .

Further, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) for detecting game balls entering the various ball entry means corresponding to the various ball entry means such as the general winning section 31. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and the first starting A first start-up prize switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the prize-winning portion 33a, a second start-up prize switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second start-up prize portion 33b, and a position corresponding to the through gate 34 is provided. A through gate switch 225 is provided.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning section 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of balls are sent to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15. prize balls (game balls) are paid out. For example, if a ball enters the starting prize winning section 33, there are three prizes, if a ball enters the general prize winning section 31, there are five prizes, and if a ball enters the variable prize winning device 32, there are ten prizes. A ball is paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not win various prize winning means such as the general prize winning portion 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails and various members such as windmills in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4, 40 to 45, and the like.

The center prize winning unit 37 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area (game board 30). The central winning unit 37 includes a housing (center frame) 400 forming an internal area 401 into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. ing. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent member, and the internal area 401 can be seen through the front panel 402 .

A pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 are formed in the upper part of the housing 400 to serve as entrances for game balls flowing down the game area to enter the internal area 401 . In addition, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a pair of left and right blade members 404 for opening and closing the entrance opening 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. there is The "blade member 404" constitutes the "opening/closing member" in this embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is rotatably displaceable between a closed position for closing the corresponding ball entry opening 403 and an open position for opening it. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed and the game ball cannot enter the internal area 401 (ball cannot be entered). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central prize winning unit 37 is in an open state, and the game ball can enter the internal area 401 (enter the ball). becomes.

Although details will be described later, the blade member 404 has a winning ball in the starting winning part 33 (the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b), and a winning lottery based on the winning ball. When winning a prize, it is in an open state for a predetermined time. In other words, the predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) in the present embodiment is when a small winning lottery is won based on the ball entering the starting winning part 33 (first starting winning part 33a or second starting winning part 33b). Equivalent to the case of establishment. Further, in this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other. is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 includes a route sorting area 406 in which a game ball entered from the ball entry opening 403 is first guided, a winning lottery area 407 provided at the lower position, and further provided at the lower position. It is divided into a type lottery area 408 as a type lottery area and an accessory actuation lottery area 409 provided on the right side of the winning lottery area 407 .

First, the route distribution area 406 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42 and the like. In the route distribution area 406, a game ball entering the inner region 401 from the entrance opening 403 is temporarily guided to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400, and then guided to the center of the route distribution area 406 in the left-right direction. An introduction passage 601 that guides, a drop passage 602 that causes game balls to fall downward from an exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 that opens in the center of the route distribution area 406 in the left-right direction, and a drop passage 602 A route distributing member 603 as a route distributing means provided, a normal guide passage 604 provided at a left position of the route distributing member 603 and capable of guiding game balls to the lottery area 407, and the route distributing member 603. A special guide passage (special passage) 605 is provided at the right position and can guide the game ball to the accessory operation lottery area 409 .

In this embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 and the like constitute a "first route", and the special guide passage 605 and the like constitute a "second route".

A pair of left and right inlets 601b of the lead-in passage 601 are provided with internal ball detection switches 437 as predetermined detection means for detecting passage of game balls that have entered from the ball entry opening 403, respectively.

In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entrance opening 403 always passes through the left entrance portion 601b, and a game ball that enters the right ball entrance opening 403 always passes through the right entrance portion 601b. A game ball entering the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball detection switch 437 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when game balls are detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route distribution member 603 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 611 having an axial hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece portion 613 projecting upward from the shaft portion 611, and a shaft portion. A left piece 614 protruding leftward from 611 and a right piece 615 protruding rightward from shaft 611 are provided.

A shaft pin 610 is inserted through the shaft hole 611 a of the shaft portion 611 . The shaft pin 610 has its rear end supported by the upper rear wall portion 400a defining the back side of the drop passage 602, and its front end supported by the front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) defining the front side of the drop passage 602. It is As a result, the route distribution member 603 is rotatably supported around the shaft pin 610 .

A projecting portion 617 having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front is formed below the route distribution member 603 . Normally, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the route distribution member 603 is positioned so that the central piece 613 is positioned at the center in the left-right direction (axial pin) by biasing means (maintaining means) such as a weight and a coil spring (not shown). 610 ), and the right piece 615 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and is maintained in the right tilted state by being biased by the right tilted surface of the protrusion 617 .

In this right tilted state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the right side wall 602a of the drop passage 602, and the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 moves toward the special guide passage 605 on the right side. It becomes a state in which it is impossible to flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side and a state in which it is possible to flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

In other words, when the route sorting member 603 is tilted to the right in the normal state, the special guide passage 605 is closed by the route sorting member 603, while the normal guide passage 604 is open, and the ball falls down the drop passage 602. The game ball is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 along the left guide surface formed by the left side surface of the central piece portion 613 and the upper surface of the left piece portion 614 of the route distribution member 603 .

Along with this, the route distribution member 603 is rotated counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means by the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614 (see FIG. 41(b)). ].

As a result, the route distribution member 603 tilts the center piece 613 leftward from the center position in the horizontal direction (the position of the shaft pin 610) for a predetermined time, and tilts the left piece 614 downward from the horizontal direction to form a protrusion. The left tilted state is urged by the left tilted surface of the portion 617 .

In such a left inclined state, the tip portion 613a of the center piece portion 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the left side wall portion 602b of the drop passage 602, and the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 moves toward the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. It becomes a state where it cannot flow down to the right side, and it becomes a state where it can flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

In other words, during the predetermined time period in which the route sorting member 603 is tilted to the left, the normal guide passage 604 is closed by the route sorting member 603, while the special guide passage 605 is opened. As a result, the game ball falling down the drop path 602 at this timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, the second game ball B1 that is normally guided to the guide path 604 and the If there is a game ball B2), the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side along the right guide surface composed of the right side surface of the central piece portion 613 and the upper surface of the right piece portion 615 of the route distribution member 603. will be taken.

Once the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted state, the biasing force of the biasing means (when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the game ball from contacting the right piece portion 615 41(c)].

In this embodiment, the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the right tilted posture, which is the first posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted posture, which is the second posture, corresponds to the second state. Equivalent to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the route distribution member 603, such as the first state and the second state, directs the game ball to the first route including the normal guide passage 604 and the like, and the second route including the special guide passage 605 and the like. A flowable state constitutes a specific state. Of course, the specific state is not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the structure of the accessory operation lottery area 409 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the accessory activation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which game balls guided by the special guide passage 605 can enter (pass). The passage widths of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 are set to a width through which game balls can pass one by one. Also, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401 (on the back side of the game board 30) through a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "opportunity ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 for detecting game balls passing therethrough. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "momentary ball entry detection means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate a movable accessory 722, which will be described later. Then, when winning the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time. The details of the configuration and operation mode of the movable accessory 722 will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if game balls are detected by the special gate switch 651, no prize balls are paid out (the number of prize balls is 0). Not limited to this, when game balls are detected by the special gate switch 651, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out.

Next, the configuration of the lottery area 407 will be described in detail. A winning/failing lottery area 407 is provided with a rotary unit 410 as a winning/failing sorting means. The rotator unit 410 has a function of distributing the destination of game balls guided from the route distribution area 406 via the normal guide passage 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the internal area 401 . The passage width of the normal guide passage 604 is set to a width through which game balls can pass one by one.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the rotator unit 410 includes a unit base 411 serving as a base portion, and a unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface thereof.

The unit base 411 has a substantially disc-shaped rotating body 414 mounted on an installation table 413 projecting from the upper surface thereof, and a rotating body motor 415 for rotating the rotating body 414 is mounted. . On the other hand, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotating body motor 415 to the rotating body 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411 .

The rotating body 414 is installed such that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the vertical direction so that the upper surface thereof faces obliquely upward on the front side. The rotator motor 415 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven and controlled by pulse signals output from the main controller 261 . With such a configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a constant direction (counterclockwise direction in this embodiment) at a constant cycle.

The rotating body 414 is formed with pocket portions 416 each capable of receiving one game ball at three locations on the outer peripheral edge thereof. The three pocket portions 416 are divided into one special pocket portion 416a and the other (two) non-special pocket portions 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416 b has a bottom wall portion 417 and opens to the outer peripheral side and upper side of the rotating body 414 . The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 .

On the other hand, the special pocket portion 416a is open to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414, upward and downward, and does not have the bottom wall portion 417 like the non-special pocket portion 416b. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a colored resin material different from that of other portions. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b.

The unit cover 412 includes a substantially cylindrical cylindrical wall portion 431 arranged to surround the rotating body 414, and a stage portion 432 formed to extend outward from the cylindrical wall portion 431. ing.

An upper edge portion of the cylindrical wall portion 431 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage portion 432, and a gate portion 435 is provided on the front side thereof to allow communication between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical wall portion 431. .

In addition, the upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured so that a game ball can roll. A portion of the stage portion 432 located behind the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the cylinder wall portion 431 side, and a portion located in front of the gate portion 435 is inclined backward (toward the gate portion 435 side). downward sloping.

As a result, the game ball guided to the rear side of the stage portion 432 through the outlet portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the central rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 defining the back side of the lottery area 407 is While the movement toward the rotating body 414 is restricted by the cylindrical wall portion 431 , it rolls clockwise or counterclockwise on the stage portion 432 toward the near side, swings left and right several times in front of the gate portion 435 , and so on. Then, when the relative positions of the gate portion 435 and the pocket portion 416 (the special pocket portion 416a or the non-special pocket portion 416b) of the rotating body 414 match, they enter the pocket portion 416. .

Further, the unit base 411 includes a first V prize passage 427 for guiding game balls housed in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and a game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b. and an out passage 428 for discharging to the outside of the internal region 401 is provided.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 with respect to the rotating direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotor 414 , that is, on the right side of the gate portion 435 . On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream than the first V winning passage 427 , that is, at the right back position of the first V winning passage 427 .

In addition, the entrance side of the first V winning path 427 is opened on the upper surface of the installation table 413, and is configured so that the pocket portion 416 of the rotating body 414 can pass thereabove. Then, the game ball entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435 moves to the position between the special pocket portion 416a and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. match, the ball drops downward from the special pocket portion 416 a and enters the first V prize passage 427 . At a position corresponding to the first V winning path 427 , a cylindrical wall portion 431 protruding downward from the back surface of the stage portion 432 restricts game balls from falling out of the side surface of the rotating body 414 .

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435, as the rotating body 414 rotates, the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 Even if the positions match, the game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b is prevented from falling (entering) into the first V winning passage 427 by the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b. It's becoming

A notch portion 431 a is formed in the lower edge portion of the cylindrical wall portion 431 at a position corresponding to the out passage 428 . As a result, the rotating body 414 rotates further, and when the positions of the non-special pocket portion 416b containing the game ball and the out passage 428 match, the game ball contained in the non-special pocket portion 416b moves toward the bottom wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 417 , the ball moves to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 and falls (enters) into the out passage 428 through the notch portion 431 a of the cylindrical wall portion 431 .

The housing 400 is formed with a connection passage 429 connected to the outlet of the first V prize passage 427, and the connection passage 429 establishes communication between the first V prize passage 427 and the type lottery area 408.

Also, the first V winning path 427 is provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. When a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. becomes. Therefore, the "1st V winning path 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball enters the 1st V winning path 427 and generates a big hit, the regulation time of 30 seconds elapses after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Alternatively, on the condition that a prescribed number of eight game balls are won in the variable prize winning device 32, one opening/closing operation until the variable prize winning device 32 is closed is regarded as one prize state, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (predetermined rounds).

In this embodiment, as the types of the big win state, the "3 round big win" in which the above-mentioned special prize state (round) is repeated three times, the "7 round big win" in which the above-mentioned special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and the above-mentioned special prize state A "15-round jackpot" is set in which (round) is repeated 15 times.

However, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, instead of immediately starting the jackpot state, the jackpot is won in the type lottery area 408. After the type of state is determined, the jackpot state is initiated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and passes through the first V winning passage 427 is detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461, You will be guided to area 408 .

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special entering ball detection switch 462 for detecting game balls passing through and discharged out of the internal region 401 .

In addition, in the upper edge of the cylindrical wall portion 431, a predetermined circumferential section including the upper side of the entrance portions of the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428 is formed so as to extend toward the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical wall portion 431. A formed ledge 440 is provided.

The protruding portion 440 is configured to cover from above a part of each pocket portion 416 located therebelow (an area of about half of the rotating body 414 in the radial direction). As a result, another game ball rides on the upper side of the game ball that has entered the predetermined pocket portion 416, and the two game balls that are vertically overlapped are continuously connected to the first V winning passage 427 or the out passage 428. To avoid a situation in which a game ball enters or jumps over a cylindrical wall part 431 for some reason and directly enters a pocket part 416 at a position coinciding with a first V winning passage 427 and an out passage 428.例文帳に追加can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism section 721 is provided at the rear portion of the rotor unit 410. As shown in FIGS. The bypass mechanism section 721 includes a movable accessory 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled in an opening accommodating section 433 formed at the most upstream portion of the stage section 432, and a movable mechanism for operating the movable accessory 722. It is provided with a movable accessory solenoid 725 as member driving means. The movable accessory solenoid 725 is driven and controlled by the main controller 261 constituting movable body control means.

The movable accessory 722 is assembled so as to be slidable (elevating) in the vertical direction. In a normal state in which the movable accessory solenoid 725 is in a non-excited state, the movable accessory 722 is almost entirely accommodated in the opening accommodating portion 433, and its upper surface is substantially continuous with the upper surface of the stage portion 432. It is in a state [see FIGS. 44(a) and 45(a)]. The accommodation state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the non-advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory solenoid 725 is energized and the bypass mechanism 721 is activated, the movable accessory 722 rises and a part of it protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage 432 [Fig. 44(b) and FIG. 45(b)]. The action of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the predetermined action in this embodiment, and the operating state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the upper surface of the movable accessory 722, there are a left inclined portion 727 that gently slopes downward toward the left from the approximate center in the horizontal direction, and a right inclined portion 727 that gently slopes downward toward the right from the approximate center in the horizontal direction. A ramp 728 is formed.

In a normal state in which almost the entire movable accessory 722 is accommodated in the opening accommodation portion 433, the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable accessory 722. The game ball drawn out from 604 a is guided to the left or right of stage section 432 by left inclined portion 727 or right inclined portion 728 on the upper surface of movable accessory 722 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), inside the movable accessory 722, a second V winning path 730 is provided. The passage width of the 2nd V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one.

When the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the movable accessory 722 blocks the front of the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604, and the entrance portion 730a of the second V prize passage 730 and the normal guide passage 44(b) and 45(b)]. As a result, the game ball can enter from the normal guide path 604 to the second V winning path 730, and both paths 604 and 730 are in a communicating state.

In addition, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the exit portion 730b of the second V prize passage 730 faces the entrance portion 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the rear side of the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400. It will be in the facing state. As a result, the game ball can enter the bypass passage 737 from the second V winning passage 730, and both passages 730 and 737 are in a communicating state.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are in communication through the second V winning passage 730 so that the game ball can pass through.

The passage width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one. An exit portion 737 b of the bypass passage 737 opens in a lower rear wall portion 400 c of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the type lottery area 408 above the 15R ball entrance 731 . As a result, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the game balls normally guided to the guide passage 604 are directly guided to the guide passage 604 without going through the rotor unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism portion 741, which will be described later. It becomes possible to guide to the ball entrance 731. That is, by activating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to avoid sorting by the rotator unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism section 741. FIG.

The bypass passage 737 is provided with a second special ball entry detection switch 738 as special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. When the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a big hit state (special game state) is granted. .

However, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a ball is detected by the second special ball detection switch 738, the jackpot state is not immediately started, and the game ball is 15R ball. After the ball hits the mouth 731, the jackpot state is started.

In addition, when the game ball remains in the second V winning passage 730 and the movable accessory 722 descends and returns to the accommodation state, the remaining ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 through the lower passage 739. , and is configured to be detected by the second special incoming ball detection switch 738 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the first special ball-entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball-entering detection switch 738, the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15) is 10 It is configured such that one game ball is paid out. Of course, the number of game balls to be paid out in response to these entering ball detection switches is not limited to ten, and may be any other number. Further, it may be configured such that no game ball is paid out when the game ball is detected by these entering ball detection switches (the number of prize balls is 0).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "jackpot caused by a game ball entering the 1st V winning passage 427" and "jackpot caused by a game ball entering the bypass passage 737 via the 2nd V winning passage 730" are common. It may be called a "V winning jackpot".

Next, the type lottery area 408 will be described in detail. In the type lottery area 408, there are a 15R ball entrance 731 that gives a "15 rounds" jackpot state (15 rounds jackpot) when a game ball enters, and a "7 rounds" when a game ball enters. A 7R ball entrance 732 where a jackpot state (7 round jackpot) is awarded, and a 3R ball entrance 733 where a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot) is awarded when a gaming ball enters. is provided. Here, the "15R ball entrance 731", the "7R ball entrance 732" and the "3R ball entrance 733" constitute the "type corresponding ball entrance means" in this embodiment.

In addition, the 15R ball entrance 731 is provided with a 15R ball entrance detection switch 734 for detecting a game ball that has entered here. Similarly, the 7R ball entrance 732 is provided with a 7R ball entrance detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered here, and the 3R ball entrance 733 is provided with a 3R that detects a game ball that has entered here. A ball entry detection switch 736 is provided.

In the type lottery area 408, the destination of the game ball led to the type lottery area 408 via the 1st V winning passage 427 and the connection passage 429 is indicated by a 15R entrance 731, a 7R entrance 732, or a 3R entrance. 733 is provided as a type sorting means (type determining means).

The type sorting mechanism unit 741 includes a start table 742 guided by the game balls drawn out from the outlet part 429a of the connection passage 429, a first bridge plate 744 guided by the game balls passing through the start table 742, and the A second bridge plate 745 to which the game ball that has passed through the first bridge plate 744 is guided, and a 15R guide that guides the game ball that has passed through the second bridge plate 745 and guides the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731. A passageway 746 is provided.

The start table 742 is installed in the upper left part of the type lottery area 408, and its upper surface slopes downward to the right.

The first bridge plate 744 is installed on the right side of the start table 742 and slightly below the start table 742. The left end portion of the first bridge plate 744 is supported so as to be rotatable with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, and the right end side is provided as a free end. It is

The rotation shaft of the first bridge plate 744 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The first bridge plate 744 is configured to swing up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the upper surface of the first bridge plate 744 is tilted slightly downward to the right, and the forward position guides the game ball to the second bridge plate 745. , and a drop position that guides the game ball to the 3R entrance 733 so as to be displaceable.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first bridge plate 744 via the start table 742 rolls to the right end of the first bridge plate 744, if the first bridge plate 744 is in the advance position, The game ball is guided to the second bridge plate 745 .

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the first bridge plate 744 rolls to the right end of the first bridge plate 744, if the first bridge plate 744 is in the falling position, the game ball enters 3R. It is guided to mouth 733 .

In other words, the first bridge board 744 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided via the start stand 742 to either the 3R ball entrance 733 or the second bridge board 745 .

The second bridge plate 745 is installed to the right of and slightly below the first bridge plate 744, and its left end is pivotally supported with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, and the right end is a free end. is provided in

The rotation shaft of the second bridge plate 745 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The second bridge plate 745 is configured to swing up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the upper surface of the second bridge plate 745 is slightly downwardly inclined toward the right, and the forward position where the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, and the upper surface is greatly downwardly inclined, It is configured to be displaceable between the falling position that guides the game ball to the 7R entrance 732 .

Then, when the game ball guided by the second bridge plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second bridge plate 745, if the second bridge plate 745 is in the advance position, the game ball moves to the 15R guide path. You will be directed to 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided to the second bridge plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second bridge plate 745, if the second bridge plate 745 is in the falling position, the game ball enters 7R. It is guided to mouth 732 .

That is, the second bridge plate 745 has a function of distributing the destination of the game ball guided through the first bridge plate 744 to either the 7R entrance 732 or the 15R guide passage 746 .

The 15R guide passage 746 is installed on the right side of the second bridge plate 745 and slightly below, and its upper surface slopes downward toward the 15R entrance 731 on the right.

In this embodiment, the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 are configured to swing at different cycles. For example, the first bridge plate 744 is configured to swing slightly faster than the second bridge plate 745 .

In addition, in this embodiment, after the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, any one of the 15R ball ball detection switch 734, the 7R ball ball detection switch 735, or the 3R ball ball detection switch 736 is activated. When the entry detection is performed, the jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. Also, after the second special ball detection switch 738 is detected, when the 15R ball detection switch 734 is detected, the jackpot state corresponding to the 15 round jackpot is started. It has become.

From here, the description of the game board 30 is returned to. As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting prize winning section 33a is provided on the lower left and lower right sides of the central prize winning unit 37. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second starting prize winning section 33 b is provided directly below the central prize winning unit 37 .

Further, the second starting winning portion 33b has a pair of opening/closing members 33c that can be opened and closed on both sides thereof. In this embodiment, when the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball is configured to be unable to enter the second starting winning portion 33b.

In other words, the first start winning part 33a allows the game ball to enter at all times, while the second start winning part 33b is used for the ball entry assist lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34. When winning, the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is opened, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning part 33b.

Not limited to this, when the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is in a closed state, the game ball becomes difficult to enter the second starting winning part 33b, and when winning the ball assist lottery, opening and closing the starting opening It may be configured such that the member 33c is in an open state and the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning portion 33b.

As described above, the first start-up winning section 33a is provided with the first start-up winning switch 224a for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start-up winning section 33a. Similarly, the second start prize winning section 33b is provided with a second start prize winning switch 224b for detecting a game ball entered here. Each starting winning switch 224a, 224b constitutes the "starting winning ball detection means" in the present embodiment.

Then, although the details will be described later, when the game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, it becomes a "hit" or a "loss" advantageous to the player. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not

The "hit" in the win/fail lottery includes a "small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central prize winning unit 37 is opened and a "big win" in which the big prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when a winning lottery is performed based on detection of a ball by the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, the result of the winning lottery is indicated on the special display device 43, which will be described later. A variable display and a stop display are performed for this purpose.

In the present embodiment, a common lottery is performed when the first start winning switch 224a detects the entry of a ball and when the second start winning switch 224b detects the entry of a ball. , The common special display device 43 is configured to perform variable display, but the first variable display for teaching the result of the lottery performed based on the detection by the first start winning switch 224a is performed. A special display device and a second special display device that performs variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed based on the detection by the second start winning switch 224b may be provided separately. The first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b may be used as the first or second opportunity winning ball detection means. Furthermore, when adopting such a configuration, each variable display is stored separately, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it was stored, or one is prioritized over the other. It may be configured as In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratio of the type of the big win state to be given when winning the winning lottery may be made different or may be made the same.

In the game areas on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, there are formed downflow areas in which game balls can flow down. The through gates 34 are arranged in the flow-down areas on the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, respectively, and are configured so that the game balls flowing down here can pass through one by one. The flow area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be set as the first flow route, and the flow area on the left side may be set as the second route. Also, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 34 . When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball-entering assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not the second starting winning portion 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is to be opened. Then, when the player wins the ball-entering assist lottery, the second start winning portion 33b (the start opening opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

In the upper right part of the game board 30, there is a through-gate display device (ordinary symbol display device) 41 that displays the lottery result of the ball-entering assist lottery based on the ball entering the through-gate 34 (ball passing), and each start winning part. A special display device (special pattern display device) 43 for displaying the lottery results of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the 33a and 33b, and the lottery for the operation assist lottery based on the ball entering the special gate 650 (ball passing). A special gate display 44 is provided for displaying the results. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special display device 43 constituting the first display means is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps. It is

The configuration of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 is not particularly limited to the configuration described above. It may be configured by a different display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b), a variable display (switching display) is started, and after a predetermined time, when the variable display is stopped, a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed. The first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b may be used as the first or second opportunity ball entry means. Furthermore, the display contents of the special display device 43 are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the winning lottery is definitively displayed.

In the case of winning a jackpot in such a winning lottery, the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed after the large winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 was switched from the closed state to the open state, or the variable winning device 32 On the condition that a specified number of 8 game balls wins, one opening and closing operation until the closed state is regarded as one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). ) is given.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, only when a "jackpot" is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33 (the first starting prize winning section 33a or the second starting prize winning section 33b). Instead, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball is detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461, the movable accessory 722 ( A game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730), and when the game ball is detected by the second special entering detection switch 738, a big win state (V winning big win) also occurs.

Also, during the variable display of the special display device 43, when a new game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), the corresponding variable display is , after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. That is, the variable display of the special display device 43 is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times that the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. , a total of four variable displays are reserved.

Further, the number of suspension times of the variable display of the special display device 43 is displayed by a special display device suspension lamp 47 provided in the vicinity of the special display device 43 . The special display device suspension lamp 47 of the present embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of suspensions is indicated by appropriately switching the ON/OFF state of each lamp.

In addition, when a game ball newly wins the start winning part 33 during the big win or the small win, the variable display for that amount is also suspended, and the variable display is executed after the big win state or the small win state ends. be done.

In the through-gate display device 41, when a game ball passes through the through-gate 34, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. When doing so, a mode corresponding to the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed. Here, when the lottery result of the ball-entering assist lottery is a lottery result corresponding to the opening of the starting port opening/closing member 33c, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through-gate display device 41, and the variable display is stopped. After that, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened. Further, the through-gate display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, to display the result of the ball-entering assist lottery.

Further, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the display device 41 for the through gate, the variable display for that amount is performed after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. It is configured. That is, the variable display of the through-gate display device 41 is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. The gate holding lamp 48 is turned on to display. The through-gate suspension lamp 48 of the present embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of suspensions is taught by appropriately switching the ON/OFF state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. At that time, a mode corresponding to the result of the operation assist lottery is displayed. Here, when the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is the winning result of activating the movable accessory 722, after the predetermined stop result is displayed on the special gate display device 44 and the variable display is stopped, the movable Role 722 is activated. Further, the display contents of the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the operation assist lottery is definitively displayed.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 and during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is activated by the special gate switch 651. Even if it is detected, the variation display (actuation assist lottery result) for that amount is not withheld.

A performance display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37 . The effect display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. In the effect display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variable display and lottery results displayed on the special display device 43. , the display is performed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable winning device 32 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area (game board 30). In addition, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a big win occurs, the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a is opened so that the game balls can enter the big winning opening. It is in an open state.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear surface of the game board 30, a resin-made frame cover 213 that covers the center winning unit 37 and the like from behind is provided so as to protrude rearward. A display control device 45 and a sub-control device 262 are detachably attached to the back side of the frame cover 213 .

The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45 a and fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213 . The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). Also, the board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning section 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won prizes in various prize winning means. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 having a main controller 261 mounted thereon is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The circuit board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board (not shown) electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223 and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a second board relay board (not shown) electrically connected to various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 via cable connectors. Specifically, the second board relay board includes an internal ball entry detection switch 437, a first special ball entry detection switch 461, a non-special entry ball detection switch 462, a round ball entry detection switch (15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry It is electrically connected to the ball detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736), the second special ball entry detection switch 738, and the special gate switch 651, respectively. This second board relay board relays various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main controller 261, and like the first board relay board, it connects with the main controller 261 via a cable connector. electrically connected.

On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b for detecting the ball entering the start winning portions 33a and 33b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without going through the relay board.

Under the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various incoming ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. are paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225, the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and the special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown, on the back side of the game board 30, a solenoid for opening and closing the large winning opening opening/closing member 32a is provided by the variable winning device 32. A starting port solenoid is provided for opening and closing the pair of starting port opening/closing members 33c. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a third board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main controller 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, time reduction mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and inner A terminal for outputting information about the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no ball error, payout error, payout from payout control device 311 A terminal or the like is provided for outputting information about the number of winning balls.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and is gently inclined toward the downstream side. Concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed.

That is, the game balls that have won prizes in the general prize winning section 31 and the like are collected via the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 . The out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and game balls that have not won any winning means are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute.

In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in , an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main controller 261 (main substrate) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The main controller 261 constitutes special game state imparting means, opening/closing control means, and the like in this embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be formed into one chip, but may be formed into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is performed when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when power is shut off due to power failure. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, a through gate display device 41, a special display device 43, a special gate display device 44, and the like, which will be described later. With this configuration, the through gate display device 41 , the special display device 43 and the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by the main controller 261 . On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards etc. is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, a start winning switch 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, an internal ball detection switch 437, Special entry detection switches 461, 738, non-special entry detection switch 462, round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, special gate switch 651, various detection switches that can constitute predetermined detection means, various substrates, blades A blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the member 404, a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, a movable accessory solenoid 725 that vertically moves the movable accessory 722, and swings the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745. Various electric parts such as a motor that drives the motor are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the performance button 125, various illumination parts, and the lamps 102 and 104. FIG.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a production pattern command such as a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and displays on the production display device 42 Let As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a hit, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 , a display matching the display of the special display device 43 is performed.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibition button 18a ( 1) is not operated, the shooting device 60 is driven, and game balls are shot at predetermined intervals with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. FIG. In this embodiment, it is configured so that it can be fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds (about 100 shots per minute).

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-control device 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529. FIG.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches, motors, etc., +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including the power turned on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the starting winning switches 224a and 224b, the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening opening and closing member 32a) is opened, the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404 ) and a variable time selection counter used to determine the variable display time (variable time) performed by the special display device 43. C2, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the success/fail random number counter C1, and based on the detection of the through gate switch 225, whether to open the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening/closing member 33c) A ball-entering assist random number counter C3 used for the entry assist lottery to determine whether or not, and an operation assist random number used for the operation assist lottery to determine whether to operate the movable accessory 722 based on the detection of the special gate switch 651. A counter C4 is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 has a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is stored. is provided. Both the special variable reservation area and the normal variable reservation area have one execution area and four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area).

In addition, in each reservation area of the special variable reservation area, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first and second start winning parts 33a and 33b. Stored sequentially. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total as described above.

Further, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the values of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 are stored in chronological order according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the through-gate display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the hit/fail random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399. It is configured to return to Normally, when the yes/no random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the corresponding no random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 399) similar to the success/failure random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize winning portion 33b (the timing detected by the first start prize winning switch 224a or the second start prize winning switch 224b), it is stored in the hit/fail random number counter buffer. The value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is stored in the special change holding area.

In this embodiment, in the win/loss lottery performed based on the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the special change holding area, one of the lottery results of 'small win', 'big win' and 'loss' is obtained. Winning lottery processing related to the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery constitutes the open lottery processing in the present embodiment.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values that are "jackpots" is one, and the value is "0". That is, the "jackpot" is won with a probability of 1/400, and the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "jackpot", and a 15-round jackpot state occurs. It will happen.

In addition, the number of random number values that become the "minor win" is 398, and the values are "2 to 399". That is, the "small hit" is won with a probability of 398/400.

In particular, the "small win" of this embodiment includes a "short win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Hit" exists. Therefore, among the values of the success/failure random number counter C1, "2 to 21" correspond to the "long small win", and "22 to 399" correspond to the "short small win".

Then, when the "short-term small prize" is won, the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a mode (combination of lighting lamps) corresponding to the "short-term small prize", and the blade members 404 are opened for 0.5 seconds. It will happen. In addition, when the "long small win" is won, the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a manner (combination of lighting lamps) corresponding to the "long small win", and the blade member 404 opens for 1.5 seconds. It will happen. Here, the function of the main controller 261 that executes the small winning lottery and the big winning lottery and determines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing members such as the blade member 404 constitutes the opening/closing pattern determination means in this embodiment.

Also, "1" among the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to "missing". combination) to give a stop indication.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a hit/fail judgment table that is referred to when judging whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win".

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, while the special display device 43 performs four times of the variable display, a game state is provided in which the variable display time (variation time) on the special display device 43 is shortened. be. Even if the next big win state does not occur after the end of the big win state, this game state ends when the special display device 43 performs four fluctuation displays, and after that, the normal game state is reached. back to

Hereinafter, the game state in which the variable time of the special display device 43 is shortened is called "time shortening mode", and the normal game state in which normal variable display is performed without shortening the variable time is called "normal mode". Specific fluctuation times of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" and the "normal mode" will be described later.

Furthermore, in the "time reduction mode", the start opening opening and closing member 33c of the second start winning part 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the "high ball entry state" that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning part 33b. becomes. As a result, the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is hardly opened, and the game ball is hard to enter the second starting winning part 33b. , making it easier to enter the game ball into the second start winning part 33b.

Specifically, in the "normal mode", the fluctuation time of the through-gate display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through-gate 34 is 10 seconds. , the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the ball-entering assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the "time reduction mode", the change time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the opening opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the ball-entering assist lottery is 2 seconds.

That is, in the "time shortening mode", the change time of the through-gate display device 41 is shorter and the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c is longer than in the "normal mode". Since the time zone in which the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in an open state becomes longer, the game balls enter the second starting winning portion 33b frequently, and the lottery is continuously performed. It will be in a good state of ball retention.

In this way, in the "time reduction mode", when the variable display of the reserved special display device 43 continuously wins a small hit (the blade member 404 is closed once, the variable display is performed, Although the flow of opening is the same, the blade member 404 is opened almost continuously (in quick succession) because the fluctuation time is short. For this reason, it is easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "big hit" or "small hit (short small win and long small win)" in the lottery based on the ball entering the start winning part 33, and the "small win (short The opening time of the blade member 404 at the time of occurrence of "small hit and long small hit" is the same in any mode (time shortening mode and normal mode).

In addition, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the operation assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate switch 651 mode is the same.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), the variable time selection counter buffer The stored value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM503.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special display device 43 is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds" when a "small win" is obtained in the winning lottery in the "normal mode". Note that the ROM 502 stores in advance a variable time selection table that is referred to when determining which of the "two-second variation" and the "three-second variation" the value of the variable time selection counter C2 corresponds to. Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the first variation pattern storage means in this embodiment.

Further, the variation time of the special display device 43 is "7 seconds" in the case of "big hit" or "loss" in the lottery in the "normal mode".

On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" is uniformly "0.1 second" regardless of the result of the lottery ("small win", "big win" or "loss"). . It should be noted that the variation time associated with the special display device 43 is not limited to the four variations of the 2-second variation, 3-second variation, 7-second variation, and 0.1-second variation according to the present embodiment, and different variation times are employed. You may

Also, the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the success/failure random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers and that they are not synchronized in any case.

Also, the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. be.

Usually, there are 8 random number values to be won, and the range is "1 to 8". Then, when the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, after a variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the display device 41 for the through gate, it stops in a manner corresponding to winning or losing (a combination of lamps that light up). A display is made, and if the winning is won, the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Further, the actuation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19). The activation assist random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

Usually, there are 15 random number values to be won, and the range is "1 to 15". Then, when the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, after a variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the special gate display device 44, a stop display is performed in a manner corresponding to winning or losing (a combination of lamps that light up). is performed, and if the player wins, the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism 721 will be in a projecting state for a predetermined time. Therefore, the operation assist lottery constitutes the operation lottery process in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes the operation assist lottery constitutes the "lottery process executing means" and the "status lottery means".

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, various prize winning switches are read. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, judges the states of the switches, and saves detection information. When game balls are to be paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to this is added, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the process ends. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 . Also, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example).

Also, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the hit/fail random number counter C1, the variation time selection counter C2, the entry assist random number counter C3, and the actuation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to their maximum values (in this embodiment, they are "399", "9", "9", "19") are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step S304, the starting winning process accompanying the winning to the starting winning part 33 (first starting winning part 33a or second starting winning part 33b) is executed, and in step S305, the game ball passes through the through gate 34. In step S306, a ball count process accompanying a ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is executed.

In the subsequent step S307, detection by the first special ball-entering detection switch 461 (entering the first V prize passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or the second special ball-entering detection switch 738 Executes a special winning process associated with the detection by (entering the bypass passage 737 through the second V winning passage 730 of the movable accessory 722).

Further, in step S308, non-special winning processing accompanying detection by the non-special ball detection switch 462 (entering the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414) is executed, and in step S309. , special gate passage processing accompanying the passage of the game ball to the special gate 650 is executed.

After that, in step S310, the ball type entry processing accompanying detection by the round entry detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (entering the 15R entry hole 731, 7R entry hole 732, and 3R entry hole 733) is executed. , once terminates the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the special variation reservation area, the success/failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the variation time random number storage area that stores the value of the variation time selection counter C2, and the suspended variation A start prize determination flag is provided for determining whether the display is based on the entry of a ball into the start prize portion 33 of either the first start prize portion 33a or the second start prize portion 33b.

In addition, in the special variable holding area in the present embodiment, in addition to the area for storing the values of the above-described win/fail random number counter C1 and variable time selection counter C2, in the win/fail lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, the "jackpot "Jackpot occurrence flag indicating that you have won", "Out" flag indicating that you have won, Long small hit occurrence flag indicating that you have won "Long small hit", Short indicating that you have won "Short small hit" A small hit occurrence flag is provided. In addition, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag that indicate the variation time on the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first and second start winning portions 33a and 33b is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, " 4”) Determine whether it is less than If a negative determination is made in step S501, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S501 is affirmative, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start prize winning section 33a based on the detection information of the first start prize winning switch 224a. If the determination in step S502 is negative, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the determination in step S502 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S503, and the suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special variable reservation area. Here, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to the big win are stored in the special change holding area during a predetermined big win state. Alternatively, in a predetermined jackpot state, when various counter values corresponding to the jackpot are stored in the special variable holding area, the predetermined condition may be satisfied at a predetermined rate, for example, 60% probability.

In step S505, the starting prize determination flag in the holding area storing the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is turned on. In addition, the starting winning determination flag of the present embodiment is set to ON when the suspended variable display is based on the winning of the ball into the first starting winning section 33a, and the flag of winning into the second starting winning section 33b is set to off if it is based on

In the following step S506, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a "small hit" or "big hit" or not. In addition, the details of the success/failure determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S507, a variable time determination process for determining the variable time in the special display device 43 is performed based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reservation area. Details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

After that, in step S508, setting processing of the preceding command is performed. It should be noted that, in the starting command, the reserved and stored variation information (predetermined information used for determining the contents of the variation display) indicates whether the ball is entered in either the first start prize winning section 33a or the second start prize winning section 33b. Information indicating whether it is based on fluctuation information, information indicating "small hit" or "big hit", information indicating fluctuation time, etc. Output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201) be done.

Here, the details of the success/failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to determine also the types of small hits (long small hits, short small hits) in the propriety determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area matches the value "0" corresponding to the "jackpot". In addition, during a predetermined jackpot state, for example, various counter values corresponding to specific jackpots that can be given a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode after the end, such as a variable jackpot, are stored in a special fluctuation reservation area. A predetermined condition may be satisfied when the Then, if the determination in step S5101 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that a big win state will occur, the big win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this processing ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5101 is negative, in step S5103 it is determined whether the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area matches the value "1" corresponding to "out". determine whether or not If the determination in step S5103 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined to be "out", the out flag is turned on in step S5104, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be a "small hit", then in step S5105 the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area is changed to "long small". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "hit". If the determination in step S5105 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the long small hit generation flag in step S5106.

Also, if the determination in step S5105 is negative, that is, if it is determined to be a "short-time small win", in step S5107, the short-time small win occurrence flag is turned on, and then this process ends.

Next, the variation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. The function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S507 constitutes the first fluctuation pattern selection means in this embodiment.

First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, the 0.1 second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds is set to on. , the process ends. That is, in the time shortening mode, regardless of whether the lottery result is a big win, a small long win, a small short win, or a loss, the fluctuation time of the corresponding fluctuation display is uniformly set to 0.1 seconds.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5203, it is determined whether or not a long small hit occurrence flag has been set in the winning determination processing performed immediately before. If the determination in step S5203 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined to be a "long small win", in step S5204, the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation reservation area is set to "0". , 1”.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is any one of "2 to 9", then in step S5205, the variable display performed by the special display device 43 is displayed as a variable time. After turning on the 3-second variation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, in step S5206, after turning on the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, this processing is executed. finish.

Also, if the determination in step S5203 is negative, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short-circuit small hit occurrence flag is ON. If the determination in step S5207 is affirmative, that is, if a "short hit" occurs, in step S5208, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is "0, 1". Determines whether or not it matches with either of

If the determination in step S5208 is affirmative, in step S5205, the 3-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is set to ON for 3 seconds, and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5206, the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is set to ON for 2 seconds, and then this process is executed. finish. That is, there is a higher possibility that a longer variation time (3 seconds) is selected when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

In addition, if the determination in step S5207 is negative, that is, in the case of a "jackpot" or "loss", in step S5209, the variable display performed on the special display device 43 is displayed for 7 seconds. After turning on the second fluctuation flag, this processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning section 33b is determined by the second start It is determined by the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the suspension counter Na is incremented by one in step S510.

In the following step S511, each value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special variable reservation area. In step S512, a win/fail determination process is performed. The success/failure determination process in step S512 is the same as the success/failure determination process in step S506, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In subsequent step S513, fluctuation time determination processing is performed. The suitability determination process in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a preceding command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S601 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed by the through gate display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S602 is affirmative, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal reservation is performed. The counter Nc is incremented by one.

In addition, in the following step S604, a random number related to success or failure is obtained. Specifically, the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

Next, the entering ball counting process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the inlet portion 601b of the lead-in passage 601 is detected. determine whether it did. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7201 is affirmative, in step S7202, a ball entry command is set to the sub-control device 262 to notify that the game ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. When the sub-control device 262 receives a ball entry command, it outputs a ball entry effect sound and lights and blinks a ball entry lamp (not shown) to inform the player that a ball has been entered. configured to notify.

After that, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for grasping the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is incremented by one. In the following step S7204, setting processing of a monitoring timer that is taken into account in the remaining ball monitoring processing is performed. In this embodiment, "10000" is set to the watchdog timer each time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected. Also, even if a predetermined numerical value has already been set in the watchdog timer, it will be overwritten with "10000". Note that the monitor timer is decremented by one in normal processing (remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212, which will be described later) performed every 4 mecs. After step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information by the first special entering ball detection switch 461 or the second special entering ball detection switch 738. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7301, in step S7302, it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state by referring to a flag during a big hit, which will be described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, this processing ends. That is, during the jackpot state, when a game ball enters the first V prize passage 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, or , The game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), and even if the game ball is detected by the second special entering ball detection switch 738, The right to generate a jackpot condition is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, in step S7303, the special winning flag indicating that the first special entering ball detection switch 461 or the second special entering ball detection switch 738 has detected the entering ball has already been set. Determine whether or not it is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, this processing ends. That is, in a state where it has already been decided to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), the first special ball detection switch 461 or the second special ball detection switch 738 Even if the ball is detected, the jackpot for that amount is invalidated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7303, the special prize winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then this processing ends.

In this embodiment, at the stage when the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, only the right to generate the jackpot state is given, and which type of jackpot state is given Since it is not determined until the type is determined, the jackpot state is not started until the type is determined.

Similarly, at the stage when the second special entrance ball detection switch 738 is detected, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and the game ball is still entering the 15R entrance ball opening 731. Since there is no state, the big win state is not started until the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 and the "15 round big win" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process of step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the non-special entering ball detection switch 462 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is ejected outside the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) through the out passage 428 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7401 is affirmative, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1 in step S7402, and then this processing ends.

Next, the special gate passage processing in step S309 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S7501, whether or not the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 is determined based on the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7501 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, in step S7502, it is determined whether or not the third display flag to be described later is on, that is, the special gate It is determined whether or not the display device 44 is performing variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7502, in step S7503, it is determined whether or not the role product operating flag, which will be described later, is on, that is, whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation (protruding state). determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7503, this processing ends.

As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display on the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, The operation assist lottery is invalidated, and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7503 is negative, in step S7504, the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 updated by the random number updating process in step S303 is stored in the predetermined actuation assist random number storage area set in the RAM 503. do.

In the next step S7505, the special gate passage flag is turned on, and in step S7506, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter, and then this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the type entry processing in step S310. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the special prize winning flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 has detected entering a ball. When the determination in step S7602 is affirmative, in step S7603, the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the 15 round jackpot is set to ON. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S7602 is negative, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R entrance detection switch 735 has detected an entrance. When the determination in step S7605 is affirmative, in step S7606, a 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game is a 7 round jackpot is turned on. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7605, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R entering detection switch 736 has detected entering a ball. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, this processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination in step S7608 is affirmative, in step S7609, the 3R jackpot flag indicating the 3 round jackpot is turned on. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111.

In the processing of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, etc., which are sub-side control devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when the pachinko machine 10 wants to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S112, etc.). Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, in step S112, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step S113, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the game state at the time of power failure, and in step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM503. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processes of steps S201 to S212 are executed as regular processes with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43 and the second start winning section 33b updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is sent to each device on the sub side. Execute external output processing such as sending to the control device.

For example, when the effect display device 42 starts the variable display, a variable pattern command is transmitted to the sub-controller 262 . In other words, the variation pattern command is a command signal output to the sub-control device 262 to cause the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect matching the display performed by the special display device 43 . On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command determines the display mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and causes the display control device 45 to display the display mode on the effect display device 42. give instructions to

On the other hand, when stopping the variable display on the effect display device 42 , a confirmation command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 . In response to this, the sub-control device 262 that has input the confirmation command instructs the display control device 45 to end the variable display (display effect) being performed by the effect display device 42 based on the command. put out.

However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when the state is in the jackpot state, or when the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is open. In the case of (during the small hit state), since the subtraction process of the first display timer for measuring the fluctuation time in the special display device 43 is not performed (see FIG. 23), it is assumed that the special display device 43 During the variable display of (effect display device 42), when the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 is detected and the special winning flag is turned on, the special winning flag is turned on. The determination command is not transmitted to the sub-control device 262 until the V winning jackpot related to the flag ends, and is transmitted after the jackpot ends.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the subsequent step S204, a V winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, a game ball entering the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball enters the first V winning passage 427. When detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461, the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), and the game ball enters the second special entering ball detection switch 738 The setting of the jackpot that occurs based on the detection is performed. The details of this V winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special display device 43, the control details of the special display device 43 are set, and hit determination and effect patterns for the effect display device 42 are set. Details of the first display control process will be described later. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the first display control process constitutes the first display control means in this embodiment.

In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, setting of control contents of the variable winning device 32 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32 . As a result, when the jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, blade member opening/closing processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 are set. Details of the blade member opening/closing process will be described later.

In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the through-gate display device 41, the control contents of the through-gate display device 41, and the like are set. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step S209, a starting winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the starting port opening/closing member 33c of the second starting winning section 33b are set. The details of the starting winning section control process will be described later.

In step S210, a third display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the display device 44 for special gates, the content of control of the display device 44 for special gates, and the like are set. Details of the third display control process will be described later. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the third display control process constitutes the display control means in this embodiment.

In step S211, a role product driving control process related to the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this processing, drive control processing related to the rotating body unit 410, drive control processing related to the bypass mechanism section 721, drive control processing related to the type sorting mechanism section 741, and the like are performed.

For example, in the drive control processing related to the rotator unit 410, control such as rotating the rotator 414 in the counterclockwise direction at a constant speed is performed. Control such as swinging the plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm is performed.

Further, in the drive control processing related to the bypass mechanism section 721, control such as projecting the movable accessory 722 is performed when a predetermined condition is established. Details of the drive control process (hereinafter referred to as "bypass mechanism control process") relating to the bypass mechanism unit 721 will be described later.

In step S212, a remaining ball monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process of confirming whether or not a game ball exists in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. The details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

After that, in step S213, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come. Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S214 is negative, the process advances to step S215 to update the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example). After this process, the process proceeds to step S213. That is, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S212 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1) can be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), it means that the power has been shut off, so the processes from step S216 onward are performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step S216, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S217, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to After that, in step S219, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step S220, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step S221, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the processing of step S213 is the timing at which the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S212 ends, or the timing at which one cycle of the processing in step S215 performed within the remaining time ends. is running on Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the V winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1501, whether the special winning flag (see special winning processing in FIG. 18) indicating that the game ball has been detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 is ON. determine whether or not If a negative determination is made in step S1501, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process advances to step S1503 to determine whether or not the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 is set to ON.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, "15" is set in the round number counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state, and then the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special prize winning flag is turned off, and the during-big-hit flag indicating that the big-hit state is in progress is turned on. After that, in the following step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is underway is set to ON, and in step S1507, the first variable timer used for opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is set to " 7500" is set, and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to "8", and then this process is terminated.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735 is set to ON. If the determination in step S1509 is affirmative, in step S1510, the round number counter is set to "7", and then the process proceeds to step S1505 to perform the same processing as described above.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1509, in step S1513, it is determined whether or not the 3R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1513 is affirmative, in step S1514, the round number counter is set to "3", and then the process proceeds to step S1505 to perform the same processing as described above.

Next, the first display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state flag is referred to. If the determination in step S801 is affirmative, that is, if the game is in the jackpot state, the process ends. That is, during the jackpot state, a new variable display is not started, and the variable display that has already been started is not terminated.

The big win state includes the middle of the big win state (special game state), the opening period before the start of the big win state, and the ending period after the end of the big win state. In general, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display is stopped in the special display device 43 in a manner corresponding to the big win to when the variable prize winning device 32 starts to open for the first time), The effect display device 42 displays the start of the jackpot state. On the other hand, during the ending period (predetermined period after opening of the final round by the variable winning device 32), the performance display device 42 displays the end of the big win state and the mode given after the big win.

If the determination in step S801 is negative, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the special winning flag is on. In addition, the special winning flag is set to ON when the game ball is detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and the flag during the jackpot is set. It is turned off when it is turned on (see step S1505 of the V winning jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, this process is terminated. In other words, in a state where the right to generate the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the variable display is not newly started and the variable display that has already started is not terminated. .

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S802, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the small hit opening flag is set to ON. Although the details will be described later, the open small winning flag is turned on while the vane member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, that is, during the small winning state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, this process is terminated. In other words, while the central prize winning unit 37 is open (during the small win state), the variable display is not newly started, and the variable display that has already been started is not terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the special display device 43 is performing variable display by looking at the setting state of the first display flag. When the first display flag is set to ON, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the first display flag is OFF, it is considered that the variable display is not being performed. Although the details will be described later, the flag during the first display is turned on when the variable display of the special display device 43 is started (see step S808), and when the variable display of the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed ( (see step S812).

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, it is not in the big win state, the right to the big win state has been granted but the big win state has not yet started, and the central winning unit 37 is being opened (small win state) and not during the variable display of the special display device 43, the process proceeds to step S805, and the value of the suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the starting prize winning section 33 is Determine whether it is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if not even one variable display is retained and stored, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one variable display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the value of the retention counter Na in step S806.

In subsequent step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the special change reservation area is executed. This shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the special variable reserve area to the execution area side, and the first reserve area→execution area, the second reserve area→hold. The data in each area is shifted such as the first area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and so on. In the shift process, not only the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, but also the big hit occurrence flag, the outlier flag, the long small win occurrence flag, the short small win occurrence flag, the 2-second variation flag, and the 3-second The ON/OFF setting states of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag are also shifted.

In the subsequent step S808, variable display setting processing is performed. Details of the variable display setting process will now be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variation information corresponds to "big hit" by determining whether or not the big hit generation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. In addition, as a modification, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot, by referring to the success/failure determination table again in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the start winning process. It may be determined whether or not it is "0".

If affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if a "jackpot" is won in the lottery, in step S902, a direct hit indicating that a "jackpot" has been won in the lottery (a "direct hit"). Turn on the jackpot flag. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON.

If the determination in step S903 is affirmative, in step S904, a variation pattern command to determine a variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) to be a jackpot and to transmit the variation pattern (variation information) to the sub-control device 262 settings. In the following step S905, the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43 is set to a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds. The first display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. . After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S903, in step S906, a variation pattern (jackpot shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a big hit is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is sent to the sub control device. In order to transmit also to H.262, a variation pattern command is set. In the following step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. FIG. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

Also, if the determination in step S901 is negative, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the deviation flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON, thereby determining whether or not it is "out". As a modification, in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the starting winning process, it is again determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1". It may be determined.

If the determination in step S908 is affirmative, that is, if it is "out", in step S909 it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. If the determination in step S909 is affirmative, in step S910, a variation pattern to be out (outlier variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262. I do. Thereafter, in step S911, after setting the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds to the first display timer, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a variation pattern (loss shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time is determined, and the variation pattern (variation information) is sent to the sub-controller. In order to transmit also to H.262, a variation pattern command is set. In the following step S913, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. FIG. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small win", the blade open flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is ON. As a modification, in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined again whether the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any one of "2 to 21". It may be determined whether or not the "Long Small Win" has been won.

If the determination in step S915 is affirmative, that is, if it is a "long small win", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S916 is affirmative, in step S917, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the subsequent step S918, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S919, the open/close control timer used for the open/close control of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 3 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if the determination in step S916 is negative, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small per 2 seconds A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500" corresponding to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 2 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a variation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a long small hit is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-controller 262, a variation pattern command is set.

In the subsequent step S925, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S926, "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the opening/closing control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 0.1 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Also, if the determination in step S915 is negative, that is, if it is a "short hit", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S927 is affirmative, in step S928, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S929, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S930, the open/close control timer used for the open/close control of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 3 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

If the determination in step S927 is negative, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S931 is affirmative, in step S932, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the subsequent step S933, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500" corresponding to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 2 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a variation pattern (short small winning shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a short small winning is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-controller 262, a variation pattern command is set.

In the following step S936, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S937, "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the opening/closing control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 0.1 second. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that the special display device 43 is performing variable display is turned on. After step S938, the process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 23, if the determination in step S804 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S809 to perform first display timer subtraction processing. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by one every 4 msec.

Subsequently, in step S810, the value of the first display timer after the subtraction is taken into account to determine whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", affirmative determination is made in step S810.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43, and this processing ends. Based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal is output to the special display device 43 to perform switching display in the next external output process in the normal process. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S810 is affirmative, that is, if the time has come to stop the variable display in the special display device 43, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display device 43 is performed. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, in the case of a "jackpot", a plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for a few seconds) in a mode (combination) corresponding to the "jackpot", resulting in a "loss". If it is a "long small win", it is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to "out", and if it is a "long small win", it is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to "long small win", and if it is a "short small win". Stop and display in a mode corresponding to "short win".

Further, in the stop display setting process in step S813, a setting process for transmitting a confirmation command to the effect display device 42 to stop display to the sub-control device 262 is performed.

Then, in the following step S814, after the determination information setting process is performed, this process is terminated.

Here, the determination information setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit big hit flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a big win has been won in the winning lottery, the big win setting after step S1002 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, a flag during a jackpot indicating whether or not a jackpot state as a special game state is set to ON. In subsequent step S1003, the first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state is turned on. In this embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is opened when the first variable flag is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S1004, a first variable timer, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and the like and indicates whether or not a specified time has passed since the start of opening, is set. In this example, "7500" corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum open time per round (the longest time the variable winning device 32 is open) is 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of occurrences of the special prize state, that is, the number of executions of the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as the value corresponding to the "direct hit big win".

In the subsequent step S1006, setting processing of a winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 is performed. In this example, the value is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of balls entered per round. After that, this process is terminated. In the switch reading process (see step S301 in FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223. If it is determined that there is a winning counter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation number counter is set. The fluctuation number counter is means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In the present embodiment, the time shortening mode is until the special display device 43 performs four fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot state, and as will be described later, "4" is set as the counter value after the end of the jackpot. .

Here, if the counter value of the variation number counter is "0", this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the fluctuation number counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation number counter is subtracted by 1, and step The process proceeds to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the fourth variation display after the end of the big win (after the time reduction mode is applied). Here, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", a process of turning off the time reduction mode flag is performed in step S1010, a process of turning on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the variation number counter is not "0", this processing ends.

Next, the variable winning device control processing in step S206 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1201, the flag during the big hit is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of the big hit. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

If the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the subsequent step S1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is ON.

If the determination in step S1203 is affirmative, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is open, the process proceeds to step S1204 to determine whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0". That is, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If the determination in step S1204 is negative, the process advances to step S1205 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls winning the variable winning device 32 has reached a specified number per round (eight in this example). If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize winning device 32 (timing for ending the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process advances to step S1206 to determine whether or not the counter value of the round number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) has reached the specified number of times.

If the determination in step S1206 is affirmative, end setting processing is performed in step S1207, and this processing ends. Details of the end setting process will be described later.

If the determination in step S1206 is negative, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number of times, in step S1208, round forward processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the round forwarding process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter. In other words, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of executed rounds reaches the predetermined number of times. Also, in the round forwarding process, the first variable flag is turned off, and a wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set for the first variable timer.

Then, if the determination in step S1203 is negative, that is, if it is during the interval period between rounds, the process advances to step S1209 to determine whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". .

If the determination in step S1209 is affirmative, that is, if the interval period has ended and the timing for starting the next round has arrived, round start processing is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round ("7500" in this example) is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter is set to The maximum winning number per round ("8" in this example) is set. If the determination in step S1209 is negative, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output process of the next normal process based on the on/off state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in an open state. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal for closing the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

Here, the end setting processing in step S1207 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot middle flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time reduction mode flag is set to ON. That is, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of all jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot" and "V prize jackpot" ("15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot") , the time reduction mode is provided.

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, "4" is set in the fluctuation number counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1306. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the time shortening mode is set until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing for turning off various jackpot flags is performed. After step S1306, the process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade open flag (see step S914 of the variable display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1801, in step S1802, it is determined whether or not the flag during opening of the small hit indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be released by winning the "small win", the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the open/close control timer is "0". In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the "small winning" is won in the variable display setting process, the opening/closing control timer corresponds to the same time as the variable display variable time performed by the special display device 43. A value is set (see steps S919, S923, S926, S930, S934, and S937). Therefore, at the same time when the corresponding variable display ends, the determination is also affirmative.

If the determination in step S1803 is negative, the value of the open/close control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1804, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, if the timing to open the blade member 404 has arrived, in step S1805, while turning on the small hit open flag, in step S1806, the blade member 404 Perform processing to open.

After that, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON. If the determination in step S1807 is affirmative, in step S1808, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the open/close control timer, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1807 is negative, in step S1809 a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the open/close control timer, and this processing ends.

If the determination in step S1802 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the open/close control timer is "0". If the determination in step S1810 is negative, the value of the opening/closing control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1811, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if the timing for closing the blade member 404 has arrived, the small hit open flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade open flag is turned off in step S1813. It is turned off, and in step S1814, a process for closing the blade member 404 is performed, and then this process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 can execute the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means in the present embodiment a predetermined number of times (the open game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner can be executed). This constitutes opening/closing control means.

Next, the second display control processing of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display is checked, and the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display (switching display). or not. Specifically, when the second display flag is ON, it is assumed that the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is OFF, the through-gate display device 41 , it is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped.

If the determination in step S2101 is negative, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

If the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

Then, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this processing, processing is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display (switching display) in the through-gate display device 41 has been established. Specifically, the setting process of the second display timer is performed while turning on the second display flag. The second display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the through-gate display device 41. be considered.

In this embodiment, the time shortening mode in which the ball is in a high ball entry state and the normal mode have different fluctuation times of the variable display in the through-gate display device 41. In the time shortening mode, the second display timer A value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the second display timer. Of the jackpots, for example, the game state of a specific jackpot in which a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode can be given after the end of a variable jackpot, or the opening period may be set as a predetermined open game state. It should be noted that during the jackpot state, "1250" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

After step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends. When a control signal for starting variable display (switching display) is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the through-gate display device 41 .

If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S2106 to perform second display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the through-gate display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing.

It should be noted that, as described above, it is determined whether or not the game is won based on the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area. Specifically, "1 to 8" among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the entry assist random number counter C3 are the winning values.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2110 to perform determination information setting processing, and ends this processing. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening and closing the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening/closing member 33c) is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting prize winning section 33b, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning portion 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) differs between the time shortening mode, which is a high ball winning state, and the normal mode, and in the time shortening mode, the second variable A value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the timer, and a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer in the normal mode. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "100" is set for the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2107 is negative, in step S2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the through-gate display device 41, and this processing ends. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the through-gate display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the starting winning section control processing of step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second start winning portion 33b (start opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state is turned on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not ON (the second starting prize winning section 33b is in the closed state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, that is, if the second variable flag is ON, it is assumed that the second start winning section 33b is open, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, when the specified open time has passed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer has become "0", affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, and after performing end setting processing in step S2204, this processing ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Various control signals are output to the second starting winning section 33b in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON/OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is ON, a drive signal for opening the starting opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning portion 33b (starting opening solenoid), and the second starting winning portion 33b is opened. Become. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal for closing the starting port opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning section 33b, and the second starting winning section 33b is closed.

Next, the third display control process of step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, the set state of the third display flag indicating whether or not the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display is checked, and the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display (switching display). or not. Specifically, when the third display flag is ON, it is assumed that the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display, and when the third display flag is OFF, the special gate display device 44 , it is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped.

If the determination in step S2301 is negative, the process advances to step S2302 to determine whether or not the special gate passage flag is on. If the determination in step S2302 is negative, that is, if the special gate passage flag is not ON, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the special gate passage flag is on, the process advances to step S2303 to turn off the special gate passage flag. In subsequent step S2304, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44 have been met. Specifically, the third display flag is turned on, and the third display timer is set. The third display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44. be considered.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the time reduction mode or the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is uniformly set to 1 second, which corresponds to 1 second for the third display timer. A value of "250" is set.

After step S2304 ends, the third display control process ends. If a control signal for starting variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the setting in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the special gate display device 44 .

If the determination in step S2301 is affirmative, that is, if the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S2306 to perform a third display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S2307, it is determined whether or not the count value of the third display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, the third display flag is turned off in step S2308, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special gate display device 44 is performed in step S2309. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal is outputted to the display device 44 for the special gate in the external output processing in the next normal processing to perform the stop display.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 stored in the actuation assist random number storage area. Specifically, "1 to 15" among the numerical values 0 to 19 of the actuation assist random number counter C4 are the winning values.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2310 to perform determination information setting processing, and ends this processing. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the flag during operation of the accessory is turned on, and the operation time is set to the accessory operation timer.

The accessory in operation flag is determination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation.

The role product operation timer is means for measuring the operating time (remaining time) of the movable role product 722, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of operation. In this embodiment, a value "1000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the accessory actuation timer.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2307 is negative, in step S2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44, and this processing ends. Then, based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process in the normal process. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44 is realized at the timing of the third display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the accessory drive control process of step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the role product operating flag indicating whether or not the movable role product 722 is in the operating state is on. Here, if it is determined that the accessory in operation flag is not ON (the movable accessory 722 is in the accommodated state), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2401 is affirmative, that is, if the role product operating flag is ON, the movable role product 722 is considered to be in a projecting state, and the role product operation timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this process is performed, the value of the accessory activation timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2403, and it is determined whether or not the prescribed projecting time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the accessory actuation timer after the above subtraction. Here, when the defined projecting time has passed, that is, when the value of the accessory activation timer has become "0", step S2403 is positively determined. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2404, and after performing end setting processing in step S2404, this processing ends. In the end setting process of step S2404, the process of turning off the accessory in operation flag is performed.

Various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism unit 721 (movable accessory solenoid 725) in the external output process of the next normal process based on the ON/OFF state of the accessory operating flag. When the accessory operating flag is ON, a drive signal is output to excite the movable accessory solenoid 725, and the movable accessory 722 is in a projecting state. On the other hand, when the accessory operating flag is off, a drive signal is output to de-energize the movable accessory solenoid 725, and the movable accessory 722 is placed in the accommodated state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7101, in order to specify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0".

As described above, the "remaining ball monitoring counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437, and the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, 15R entry detection switch 734, and 7R entry detection switch 735 , 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 and special gate switch 651 are decremented by one.

If the determination in step S7101 is affirmative, that is, if no game balls remain in the internal area 401, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7101, then in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the game ball finally entered the internal area 401. is "0".

If the determination in step S7102 is negative, the value of the watchdog timer is decremented by 1 in step S7103, and this processing ends. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the internal area 401, "10000" is set to the monitoring timer. Therefore, the watchdog timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the last ball is entered in the internal area 401.例文帳に追加Also, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the internal area 401 until it is discharged (specifically, after the game ball is detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, the game ball Non-special entry detection switch 462, 15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 735, 3R entry detection switch 736, or time to be detected by special gate switch 651) is approximately 8 seconds to 30 seconds.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, even if the time assumed as the time from when the game ball enters the internal area 401 to when it is ejected has passed significantly, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is " 0”, it is assumed that ball clogging has occurred in the inner area 401, and error notification processing is performed in step S7104. For example, control is performed such as lighting the error display lamp 104, outputting an error notification sound, or prohibiting the shooting of game balls. After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first the reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 34, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. As shown in FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by the interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In interrupt processing, it is checked whether or not a command has been received before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed. The reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

At step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step S3116 the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, in step S3110, the power cutout occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the processing from step S3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the process of step S3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the process that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main controller 261 is acquired, and determination processing of the command is performed.

Here, the command determination processing in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main controller 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 whether it is a prize ball command It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and the player loses, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 36, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full cancellation state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. When the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set. Perform state setting. Further, in step S3206, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-tank-ball switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state are set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are executed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step S3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step S3209, and motor drive processing is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not allowed and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In subsequent step S3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the variation information included in the preceding command in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553. FIG. In the starting command, as described above, whether the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize prize portion 33b is a variable display triggered by the ball entering the start prize prize portion 33 (the start prize determination flag setting), information indicating whether it is fluctuation information corresponding to the jackpot (setting of the jackpot generation flag), information indicating whether it is a fluctuation display corresponding to the long or short information indicating whether the variation display corresponds to the loss (setting of the loss flag), the variation time of the variation display (2-second variation flag, 3-second variation flag, 7-second variation flag, setting of 0.1 second variation flag).

The pending information storage area, like the special variable pending area of the main controller 261, comprises four pending areas (first pending area to fourth pending area) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, the variation information included in the preceding command is stored chronologically in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the variable display (information stored in the special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the sub-controller 262 can also grasp the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261 .

Here, the hold information storage processing in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not an advance command has been received (whether or not the advance command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, the pending counter Np for counting the pending number of variation information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by one.

In the following step S4103, the variation information including the information on whether it is a big win, the information on whether it is a small win, the information on the variation time, etc. included in the starting command is stored in the first open reservation area of the reservation information storage area. Store in area. After that, in step S4104, the values of various counters used for determining the effect display contents are obtained, and the values are stored in the same holding area as the variation information is stored.

After performing the process of step S4104, or when a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105, and whether or not the variation pattern command is received (whether the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 or not). If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, in step S4106, the value of the pending counter Np is subtracted by one.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved information storage area to the execution area side. , second reservation area→first reservation area, third reservation area→second reservation area, fourth reservation area→third reservation area, and so on.

After the processing of step S4107 is performed, or if a negative determination is made in step S4105, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 38, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3911.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters used for determining the effect display contents is executed. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, basically based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 upon reception of the variation pattern command, various arithmetic processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates the types of various effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

In addition, the display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of the variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during the big win, and is information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. A necessary display command is generated each time. Normally, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly divided into a group of normal variable data and a group of ready-to-win effect data. By sequentially outputting in accordance with a predetermined time order based on , a display effect corresponding to various variation patterns is performed. For example, the normal fluctuation data group consists of normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2, . n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1→2→ . . . , data output is performed in order of n.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in accordance with a command from the sub-control device 262 and starts variable display, etc. on the effect display device 42 . Once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45 cooperate to continue the effect display until the confirmation command is received. Then, when the confirmation command is received, the variable display on the effect display device 42 is stopped.

Further, in step S3906, it is confirmed whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated, and if it is confirmed that the effect button 125 has been operated, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when "4" is set to the variation counter in the end setting process, or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the determination information setting process, the command including that effect is mainly used. The command information is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 displays the remaining number of times of the time reduction mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, when the sub-controller 262 receives an operation notice command output from the main controller 261 based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, the movable accessory 722 is activated. A configuration may be adopted in which an operation forewarning performance for notifying that it is the intense heat time is performed.

For example, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 at what timing by the route distribution member 603, the movable accessory 722 is better. A production or the like is performed to notify that it will operate at the timing.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the effect performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effect performed by the effect display device .

In the sound setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the effect performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. FIG. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen which is set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses while the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 is not being performed on the effect display device 42). display) and other processing such as control settings.

In step 3910, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3909 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when causing the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 .

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3910 performed every 1 msec is executed, or if the determination in step S3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3911 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores information on occurrence of power failure. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3912 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3913. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball launched into the game area enters the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b), and When a small winning lottery based on the winning ball is won, the vane member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball opening 403 is opened for a predetermined time.

When the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the game ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 is dropped through the introduction passage 601 and into the drop passage 602. be guided to

The destination of the game ball dropped down the drop path 602 is a normal guide path 604 that can be guided to the win/fail lottery area 407 or a special guide path 605 that can be guided to the accessory actuation lottery area 409 by the route sorting member 603. distributed to.

However, normally, the route distribution member 603 is in a right inclined state, and since the special guide passage 605 on the right side is closed, game balls falling down the drop passage 602 are guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. will be taken.

When the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined period of time due to the force received from the contacting game ball. Therefore, if there is a game ball falling down the drop path 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide path 605 .

The game balls guided to the normal guide passage 604 are guided to the success/fail lottery area 407, and their destinations are sorted by the rotator unit 410 (rotator 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning path 427 and is detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V prize jackpot) is granted. The Rukoto.

After that, the game ball detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408 and used for determination of the jackpot type. After the jackpot type (number of rounds) is determined here, the jackpot state is started.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the special guidance passage 605 is guided to the accessory operation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650 . When the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an operation assist lottery is conducted, and if the player wins the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time.

When the movable accessory 722 is activated and protrudes from the stage portion 432 , the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 communicate with each other through the second V winning passage 730 in the movable accessory 722 .

When the game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable accessory 722 is in operation, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 and detected by the second special ball detection switch 738. By doing so, the right to generate a jackpot state (V prize jackpot) is granted.

After that, when the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot is started.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state (protruding state), the game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 directly enters the 15R without going through the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism 741. You will be guided to the spherical mouth 731 .

Main effects of this embodiment will be described below. As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the movable accessory 722 in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the behavior of the game ball entering the inner area 401 can be changed. Especially in this embodiment, by activating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to perform a game effect that increases the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the V prize jackpot. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) of the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, an operation assist that determines whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 A lottery is held, and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate when winning the operation assist lottery.

As a result, the movable accessory 722 does not always move regularly or continuously, and does not operate every time the special gate switch 651 detects the ball entering. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance and increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable accessory 722.例文帳に追加

In addition, by providing a trigger ball entry means (special gate 650) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable accessory 722 in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37, based on the behavior of the game ball entering the inner area 401, Since it is determined whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state, etc., the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37, further improving interest. can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401, and cannot flow down to the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like (ball cannot enter). If the game ball passing through the special gate 650 flows down toward the first V prize passage 427, etc., there is a risk that the timing at which the movable accessory 722 acts on the game ball will always be constant. There is As a result, the effect of the action of the movable accessory 722 is always the same, and there is a possibility that the player's interest may decrease. Furthermore, there is a possibility that fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine may be easily performed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable accessory 722 . In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the first V winning passage 427 or the like through the normal guide passage 604 without going through the special gate 650 may be disturbed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the special gate 650 and the game ball on which the movable accessory 722 acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. can.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the destination of the game ball that entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the normal guide passage 604 that can guide the winning lottery area 407, or the role product operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) is provided with a route distribution member 603 for distribution to a special guide passage 605 that can be guided to 650).

Then, for example, when two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 continuously, the preceding first game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, and the following second game ball is guided to the guide passage 604. The ball is configured to be guided to the special guide passage 605 . As a result, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the game balls can be directed to both the normal guide path 604 and the special guide path 605, respectively. The action and effect of will be more effective.

However, in the present embodiment, under the configuration in which game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the shooting device 60, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds during the "short hit", At the time of "long small win", the blade member 404 is configured to be opened for 1.5 seconds. As a result, during one open state period in which the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) is in the open state, it is advantageous to the player that a plurality of game balls enter the central winning unit 37 continuously. The configuration makes it difficult for the situation to occur frequently.

Under this configuration, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the central winning unit 37 at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404), the action of the movable accessory 722 (assist ), and if the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the V prize with a higher probability, the game is started at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 continuously at the same time. There is a risk that people's expectations will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after a predetermined game ball passes through the special gate 650, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44 (time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating) ) is set to “1 second”, and the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation is set to “4 seconds”.

As a result, for example, other game balls do not enter the central prize winning unit 37 together with the game balls that have entered the special gate 650, or enter the central prize winning unit 37 together with the game balls that have entered the special gate 650. Even if the game ball does not win the V prize, the game ball that enters the central prize winning unit 37 after that is given a chance of winning the V prize with a higher probability.

In other words, a game ball other than the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball passing through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404) has a higher probability. It is configured to give you a chance to win a V prize.

More specifically, for example, two game balls enter the internal region 401 during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404), and the preceding first game ball (first identified A game ball that has passed through the entrance portion 601b as a region) flows down into the normal guide passage 604, and the second subsequent game ball (the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion 601b next) flows down into the special guide passage 605. After that, when the game ball that has flowed down to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 is activated, at the time the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide passage 604 passes through the movable accessory 722, Even if the movable accessory 722 has not yet operated and the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide passage 604 does not receive the action (assist) of the movable accessory 722 and does not win the V prize, then the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) during the next open state period, the game ball that entered the inner area 401 (the game ball that passed through the entrance portion 601 after that) flows down to the normal guide passage 604, and due to the action of the movable accessory 722, A chance to win the V prize will be given.

Of course, instead of the above configuration, the variable display time (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts to operate) performed by the special gate display device 44, the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation, etc. A game in which various set times are set to times different from the set times, and a predetermined game ball enters the internal area 401 after a relatively long period of time (for example, one minute or more) after passing through the special gate 650. A configuration may be adopted in which the ball normally flows down to the guide passage 604 and the action of the movable accessory 722 gives a chance of winning the V prize.

With such a configuration, the player actively tries to make the game ball enter the central winning unit 37 even after confirming that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. It is possible to do As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied to the above embodiment individually, or may be applied to the above embodiment by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described embodiment is of a type in which a jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) occurs in which the variable prize winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33. and a central prize winning unit 37 which is opened when a small prize is won in a winning lottery based on the entry of a ball into a starting prize winning section 33, and the central prize winning unit 37 is provided. It also has the function of a type of game machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a game ball entering the unit 37 enters the first V winning path 427 or the like to generate a big win state (V winning big win). , a so-called one-kind-two-mixer.

Not limited to this, it may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that provides a predetermined game value. The game value includes, for example, game media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) given during the big win, and a game mode such as a high probability mode given after the big win. In addition to the pachinko machine, it can also be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mammoth ball.

For example, without performing a predetermined lottery process when a game ball enters the starting winning part 33 (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning part 33 , the central winning unit 37 is in an open state, and a game ball entering the central winning unit 37 enters the 1V winning path 427 or the like to cause a big win state (so-called old type 2 pachinko) machine).

Further, instead of the variable winning device 32, a configuration may be adopted in which a central winning unit 37 as variable ball winning means opens and closes to generate a big winning state. In such a case, the variable winning device 32 may be omitted. In other words, when a big win is won in a winning lottery based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball-entering means, a predetermined variable ball-entering means (large winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes to create a jackpot state. The machine may have a configuration in which a movable body is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, a variable ball entry means such as a central prize winning unit 37 which is opened when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33 is provided, and a game ball entering the variable ball entry means is provided. may be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which a specific game value is given when a ball enters a special ball entry means such as a V winning hole. In other words, in this type of game machine, a movable body may be provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above-described embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b that constitutes the specific area, and enters the right ball entry opening 403. A game ball that has entered is configured to always pass through the right entrance portion 601b that constitutes the specific area, and a game ball that has entered the internal area 401 is detected by either the left or right internal ball that constitutes a predetermined detection means. A switch 437 always detects it. However, various configurations related to the specific region and the predetermined detection means, such as the position and number of the specific region and the predetermined detection means, are not limited to the configuration related to the entrance portion 601b and the internal entrance detection switch 437. Other configurations may be employed. For example, one exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 is defined as a specific region, and an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means is arranged here. It may be configured to be provided at a position different from the portion 601b.

Further, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 and the like (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601 and the pair of left and right inlets 601b) may be omitted. good. For example, the left ball entrance opening 403 and the like (including the left blade member 404, the left portion of the introduction passage 601 and its left inlet portion 601b) are omitted, and the right ball entrance opening 403 and the like (the right blade (including the member 404, the right portion of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet portion 601b on the right side thereof). As a result, there is one ball passage (the right side of the introduction passage 601) through which the game balls can pass one by one and can guide the game balls one by one to the exit portion 601a as a specific area provided only in one place. It is a configuration provided only for In other words, a game ball that does not pass through the one ball passage cannot enter the internal area 401 through the exit portion 601a. Also, the ball passage (the right part of the lead-in passage 601) is provided at a position through which only the game ball that is shot with a predetermined strength (right-handed) and jumps over the center winning unit 37 can pass.

Instead of or in addition to this, at the outer position (outer position than the blade member 404) on one side (for example, the right side) of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, the ball entry opening 403 on the one side (one side A ball passage (such as a ball passage member having a ball passage) that can guide game balls one by one to the side blade member 404, one side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on the one side. may be configured as follows.

In addition, in a specific area such as the exit portion 601a and the entrance portion 601b of the introduction passage 601, while allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction (internal area 401 side), the game ball in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction It is good also as a structure provided with the control means (valve-shaped member etc. which change a state from a 1st state to a 2nd state by the force received from a game ball) which controls the passage of.

Incidentally, the winning probability related to various lotteries related to the pachinko machine 10 (soft lottery process, lottery by mechanical mechanism, etc.) is appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. . It goes without saying that the configuration of the board surface of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate.

Also, the game machine may be implemented as a type of game machine that circulates game balls in the game machine and does not directly pay out the game balls to the player, that is, a so-called enclosed pachinko machine.

(b) The types of jackpots (the number of rounds, the content of the configuration, etc.) are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the types of the jackpot state are "3 round jackpot" in which the grand prize state (round) is repeated three times, "7 round jackpot" in which the grand prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and the grand prize state (round ) is repeated 15 times.

Of course, the gaming machine may be implemented as a gaming machine in which only one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15-round jackpot) occurs, instead of a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of jackpot states can occur.

(c) The configuration of the game mode to be awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration content, etc.) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, a time reduction mode is provided in which the time (variation time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43. However, the application period of the time reduction mode is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the big win state, the time reduction mode may be continued until the next big win state occurs.

Further, as a game mode after the end of the big win state, a high probability mode or the like may be provided in which the winning probability of the big win state (direct hit big win) is high instead of or in addition to the time shortening mode. A specific game mode such as a time reduction mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state. After the end of the jackpot state, when a jackpot with the right to be given a high probability mode, that is, a so-called probability variable jackpot occurs, a special display device 43 or the like is made to perform a stop display in a specific mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. may Of course, the game machine may be configured such that the time reduction mode, the high probability mode, etc. are not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the operation assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the special gate switch 651 The probability is configured to be the same in any mode.

Not limited to this, as a game mode after the end of the big win state, instead of or in addition to the time reduction mode or the high probability mode, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery, the winning probability of the operation assist lottery, the small winning ( In particular, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode (high support mode) in which the winning probability of a long small win is higher than in the normal mode is performed. At least one of these high support modes may be a specific game mode.

(d) The configuration related to the accessory activation lottery (accessory activation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, whether or not to activate the movable accessory 722 when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the accessory activation lottery area 409 An actuation assist lottery is held to decide whether or not, and when the actuation assist lottery is won, the actuation condition is established and the movable accessory 722 is configured to act.

Without being limited to this, for example, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 without performing the lottery process, the operating condition is always satisfied and the movable accessory 722 may be configured to operate.

Further, it is also possible to provide a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value exceeds a predetermined number, the operating condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is operated. good. Alternatively, a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651 is provided, and when the counted value exceeds a predetermined number, a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained. In this case, the operating condition may be established and the movable accessory 722 may be operated.

(d-2) In addition, the operation assist lottery for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is not a software lottery process, but a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a rune is provided in the internal area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37, A lottery may be drawn based on the behavior of the game ball. However, it is preferable to perform lottery processing by software in terms of simplifying the configuration of the central winning unit 37 .

For example, in the role product operation lottery area 409, game balls do not always pass through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), but the game balls pass through the special gate 650 at a predetermined rate (or do not pass). may be

(d-3) In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the trigger ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable accessory 722 is provided in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37. However, the position where the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this, and may be different.

For example, the central winning unit 37 has a second internal area different from the internal area 401 (an area where a ball can be entered from an entrance different from the ball entry opening 403 opened and closed by the blade member 404). A configuration in which an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the inner area may be employed.

(d-4) In addition, like the through gate 34, an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, and game balls flowing down the game area can enter (pass). may be configured. It should be noted that the configuration related to the opportunity ball entry means is not limited to a ball entry means such as a through gate through which the entered game ball can pass, but is an entrance such as a prize opening through which the entered game ball is discharged out of the game area. Ball means may be used. Then, a predetermined lottery process is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined through gate or a predetermined prize winning opening, and predetermined operation conditions are met, such as when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained. It may be configured such that the movable accessory 722 operates when it is established. For example, as will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the starting winning parts 33a, 33b (starting winning switches 224a, 224b) during the lottery invalid period, an operation assist lottery to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is performed. It may be configured such that the operation condition is established and the movable accessory 722 is operated when the operation assist lottery is won.

In addition, after entering the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and being guided to the special guide passage 605, the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651, the back side of the game board 30 Instead of being discharged to the central winning unit 37, it may be configured to return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37 again.

Also, the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and guided to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special guide passage 605 without being detected by the predetermined ball detecting means, Returning to the game area outside the central winning unit 37, the ball is configured to be able to enter an opportunity ball entry means (special gate, etc.) provided in the game area outside the central award winning unit 37, where the opportunity ball is entered. A configuration that can be detected by detection means (a special gate switch or the like) may be employed.

However, if the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the movement opportunity of the movable accessory 722 is arranged outside the central prize winning unit 37, the opportunity ball entry detection means (special gate switch) can be detected by using a wire rod or the like. erroneous detection and activating the movable accessory 722. From this point of view, the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is arranged in the central prize winning unit 37. is more preferred.

(d-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, the special gate display device 44 starts a variable display, and after a predetermined period of time, stops displaying in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. is performed, and if the lottery result of the actuation assist lottery here is a winning result, then the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display means (the special gate display device 44) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is omitted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second), but this is not limiting, and a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times are provided. may be configured.

For example, in the main control unit 261, a variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different variation display times, and a special gate switch 651 based on the detection of a game ball, stored in the variation pattern storage means A variation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of variation patterns, and controlling the special gate display device 44 based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means. good too.

As a result, the variable time from when the variable display is started to when the stop display is made on the special gate display device 44 can be made variable. As a result, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 to when the movable accessory 722 actually enters the operating state (advantageous state) can be made variable.

(d-6) In the above embodiment, a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display on the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722. However, the variable display (operation assist lottery result) for that amount is not withheld. In other words, the activation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the right to activate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, when a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, a predetermined number of times A configuration may be provided with holding means (variation holding area) capable of holding the variable display of minutes (operation assist lottery result).

Here, the holding means (variation holding area) includes one execution area and a plurality of holding areas, for example, in the same manner as the normal fluctuation holding area that stores the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 in the above embodiment. The values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 may be stored in the plurality of reservation areas in chronological order in accordance with the history of passage of game balls to the special gate 650. FIG. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4, and other information may be stored.

(e) The configuration related to route distribution (route distribution area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, the route sorting member 603 of the above-described embodiment is pivotally supported to be able to swing, and is normally maintained in a right tilted state by a biasing means such as a coil spring (not shown) so that the drop path 602 can be moved. A falling game ball can flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. In this state, when the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 is guided to the left normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is moved by the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece portion 614. , rotates in the counterclockwise direction against the biasing force of the biasing means, is left inclined for a predetermined time, and the game balls falling down the drop passage 602 can flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. state is configured.

The configuration (shape, operation mode, etc.) of the route distribution means is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, the shaft pin 610 is fixed to the shaft portion 611 of the route distribution member 603, and the shaft portion 611 protrudes toward the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 400a. It has an action piece 800 extending downward from its rear end, and a pair of coil springs 801 and 802 as maintenance means for supporting the action piece 800 from the left and right. The central piece 613 may be configured to be maintained in a balanced state (reference posture) without tilting to the left or right at the central position in the left-right direction (the position of the shaft pin 610).

With such a configuration, when a game ball falls to the route distribution member 603 which is in an equilibrium state at normal times, the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, or is guided to the special guide passage on the right side. It is in a state where it is not known whether it will be guided to 605 or not.

Then, when a game ball falling against the route distribution member 603 in equilibrium is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, for example, the route distribution member 603 moves from the game ball that comes into contact with the right piece portion 615. By the received force, it once rotates in the clockwise direction and enters the first state (first posture), that is, the right-tilted state [see FIG. As a result, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction and enters a left tilted state (see FIG. 41(b)), which is the second state (second posture). After that, the route distributing member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, and then returns to a balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, such that the route distributing member 603 is tilted to the right again.

Similarly, when a game ball falling against the route distribution member 603 in equilibrium is guided to the left normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is placed in contact with the left piece 614. After it rotates in the counterclockwise direction by the force received from the coil springs 801 and 802, it rotates in the clockwise direction by the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, and becomes in the right tilted state. After that, the route distributing member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times so as to be in the left tilted state again, and then returns to the balanced state by the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802 .

Under such a configuration, when two game balls continuously fall to the root distribution member 603 in equilibrium, for example, when the preceding first game ball is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 Then, the following second game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. Conversely, when the preceding first game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the subsequent second game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of game balls falling continuously are alternately distributed to different routes while adopting a relatively simple configuration without providing a driving means for driving the route distribution member 603. configuration can be realized. As a result, simplification of the configuration and control, compactness, etc. can be achieved.

(e-2) In the route distributing member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, a weight is attached to the lower end of the action piece 800, so that the route distributing member 603 normally operates. The route distribution member 603 may be configured to be freely swingable by the action of the game ball while maintaining the balanced state.

(e-3) In place of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. A configuration may be adopted in which the route distribution member 603 periodically or continuously swings between the right-tilting state and the left-tilting state. Alternatively, the route distributing means such as the route distributing member 603 may normally be in a stopped state, and may enter a predetermined operating state only when a predetermined drive condition is satisfied and a specific state is established.

(e-4) The route sorting means may not operate, and may be fixed to the housing 400 or the like, or may be integrally provided. In other words, the route may be distributed according to the random behavior of the game balls. In addition, various other configurations related to the route sorting means, such as the position and number of the route sorting means, are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, one or a plurality of route distribution means may be provided at positions different from those in the above-described embodiment (other variable ball entry means different from the above-described central winning unit 37).

(f) The configuration of various guidance routes is not limited to the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, from the time the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball From the time the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until reaching the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604), the game ball reaches the special gate. 650 (special gate switch 651), it is preferable to shorten the time required for the movable accessory 722 to reach an advantageous state.

From the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604). The game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 by the distributing member 603, the game ball reaches the special gate 650, and the advantageous state reaching time until the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous is made longer. If so, two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent game ball When the second game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 is activated. , there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Incidentally, in order to lengthen the movable body arrival time for the game ball guided to the normal guide path 604 to reach the movable accessory 722, for example, lengthening the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the normal guide path 604 is one example. Conceivable. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration in which delay means for delaying passage of game balls is installed in the normal guide passage 604 may be employed.

Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a crew, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a rib or the like to stop the momentum of the game ball and delay the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

(f-2) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball is placed in the special gate as the second route (momentary ball entry guide route) for guiding the game ball distributed by the route distribution member 603 to the opportunity ball entry means (special gate). 650 is provided with only one special guide passage 605, but not limited to this, the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means (special gate) from the route distribution member 603 is A configuration including a plurality of different second routes (momentary ball entry guidance routes) may be employed.

By providing a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guide routes), the movable accessory 722 is actually in an operating state (advantageous state) from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 (predetermined timing). The period until it becomes can be made variable.

In addition, according to the above configuration, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 to when the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is made variable by the mechanical structure based on the behavior of the game ball. As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37, which can further improve the interest.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball moves to the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604). 604a), from the time the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the first trigger ball entry means (first special gate 650A), and the movable accessory Advantageous state leading to the first second route (first special guide passage 605A) with a long time to reach the advantageous state until 722 is activated and the second opportunity ball entry means (second special gate 650B) A second route (second special guide passage 605B) having a short arrival time may also be provided. Here, the "first second route (first special guidance passage 605A)" constitutes the "first flow-down route", and the "second second route (second special guidance passage 605B)" constitutes A "second downstream route" is configured (the same applies hereinafter).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, a first special gate switch 651A for detecting a game ball passing through is provided at the first special gate 650A, and a game ball passing therethrough is detected at the second special gate 650B. A second special gate switch 651B is provided for sensing. Here, the ``first special gate switch 651A'' constitutes the ``first opportunity entry detection means'', and the ``second special gate switch 651B'' constitutes the ``second opportunity entry detection means'' ( Same below).

The passage widths of the special guide passages 605A, 605B and the special gates 650A, 650B are set to a width through which game balls can pass one by one. Also, game balls that have passed through the special gates 650A and 650B are discharged out of the internal area 401 through a discharge passage (not shown).

A slide member 655 capable of opening and closing the entrance is provided at the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction, and when it is displaced to a position protruding forward, it becomes a closed state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is closed, and moves to a rearward retracted position. The displacement results in an open state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is opened.

Then, when the slide member 655 is in the closed state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 as the upstream route distribution means pass through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and enter the first special guide passage. You will be directed to 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in the open state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 are guided to the second special guide passage 605B.

Here, a configuration in which the slide member 655 always repeats the slide displacement operation may be employed, or a configuration in which the state of the slide member 655 is periodically or randomly changed may be employed. Further, in a specific state, control may be performed so that the proportion of the slide member 655 in the open state differs from the proportion in which the slide member 655 is in the closed state.

In other words, the slide member 655 constitutes the opportunity route change means (downstream route distribution means) in this embodiment, and the destination of the game ball is set to "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or " Second second route (second special guidance passage 605B)". Note that the route sorting means such as the route sorting member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655 .

When game balls are detected by the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessories 722 respectively. Here, when winning the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time. In addition, in a specific state, the winning probability in the operation assist lottery is different between when the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A and when the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. may be That is, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio at which the movable accessory 722 can be in a predetermined operating state differs depending on the case.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, in the first special guide passage 605A, by projecting ribs 653A, 653B, the passage length of the first special guide passage 605A, which is the movement path of the game ball, is lengthened. , the momentum of the game ball is stopped and the game ball advances over time.

Instead of or in addition to the ribs 653A and 653B, other delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage, a crew, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around) mechanism) may be arranged in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A and 650B (special gate switches 651A and 651B) are provided individually corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B. However, instead of this, game balls passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B move toward one special gate (special gate switch), and the same special It may be configured to be detected by a gate switch.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 47, when a game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball always passes through the first special gate 650A (the first special gate 650A). When the game ball passes through the special gate switch 651A) and flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball always passes through the second special gate 650B (second 2 special gate switch 651B), but not limited to this, game balls pass through the first special gate 650A and the second special gate 650B as trigger ball entry means at a predetermined rate. It is good also as a structure which can pass (or does not pass). In addition, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball goes to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" A configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the game ball can pass through the opportunity ball entry means (the rate at which the movable accessory 722 can be in a predetermined operating state) differs between when it flows down.

(f-3) The configuration provided with a plurality of second routes (momentary ball entry guidance routes) as described in (f-2) above is the routes exemplified in (e-1) to (e-3) above. Under the configuration related to the distribution member 603, it is more effective.

If the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is guided to the special guide passage by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722. 605, the game ball reaches the special gate 650, and the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state. Two game balls enter the internal area 401 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent second game ball is the special guide passage. If the game is sorted to 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 is activated.

Conversely, under the above configuration, when the preceding first game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state increases, and the player watches the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 with anticipation.

On the other hand, from the time the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is specially guided by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722. When the game ball is guided to the passage 605, the game ball reaches the special gate 650, and when the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state, the time to reach the advantageous state is shortened, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent second game ball is normally guided When distributed to the passage 604, unless the movable accessory 722 is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable accessory 722 ends. There is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced because it will be understood that it will be done.

Conversely, under the above configuration, when the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603 and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state increases, and the player watches the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 with anticipation.

Therefore, if the configuration is provided with a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guide routes) as described above, two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the preceding one Even if the first game ball is distributed to either the normal guide passage 604 or the special guide passage 605, the second game ball that follows is the "first second route with a long time to reach an advantageous state (first Special guide passage 605A)” or “Second second route with short advantageous state arrival time (second special guide passage 605B)” depends on the timing at which the movable accessory 722 operates and the game ball Since there is still a possibility that the timing of reaching the movable accessory 722 matches, the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation for the occurrence of the big win state.

(g) The configuration related to the success/failure lottery (the success/failure lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(g-1) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) is provided as win/loss sorting means. The rotating body 414 has one special pocket portion 416a for big wins and two non-special pocket portions 416b for winning, and rotates counterclockwise at a constant speed.

Not limited to this, for example, the number and ratio of the pocket portions 416a and the non-special pocket portions 416b of the rotating body 414 may be changed so that the odds of winning the jackpot lottery are different.

(g-2) In addition, in the rotating body 414, for example, a special pocket portion 416a for the 3R jackpot and a special pocket portion 416a for the 7R jackpot are provided. may be In such a case, the type lottery area 408 may be omitted.

(g-3) In place of the rotating body 414, a configuration may be adopted in which another win/fail lottery mechanism such as a crun is provided.

(h) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(h-1) In the type lottery area 408, there is a type distribution means (type determination means) that distributes the destination of the game ball to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733. ) is provided.

Instead of the type sorting mechanism unit 741, a configuration including another type lottery mechanism such as Krun may be used.

(h-2) The type lottery area 408 may be omitted and, for example, when a game ball enters a special ball entry means such as the 1st V winning path 427, the type of jackpot state to be awarded may be determined. That is, the type determination for determining the type of the jackpot state may be performed by software determination processing.

(i) The configuration of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the route sorting area 406 (route sorting member 603) and the accessory operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) may be omitted. In such a case, for example, when the ball is detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, an operation assist lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the movable accessory 722 is to be operated.

However, if only the movable accessory 722 is configured to perform a predetermined action based on the ball detection by the internal ball detection switch 437, the game in which the ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 The movable accessory 722 moves with respect to the ball at the same timing each time.

Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to employ various configurations that make the operation timing variable, such as the configuration that makes the variation time variable as described above.

(j) The configuration of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 (position, shape, operation mode, advantageous state, etc.) is limited to the configuration related to the movable accessory 722 of the above embodiment. However, other configurations such as an opening/closing member may be adopted.

(j-1) For example, the movable accessory 722 according to the above-described embodiment is in an operating state (advantageous state), thereby avoiding the winning lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism unit 741. , the game ball normally guided to the guide passage 604 can be directly guided to the 15R ball entrance 731.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in an operating state (advantageous state), it is easier to win the V prize jackpot than when the movable accessory 722 is in a non-operating state (non-advantageous state). In addition, the game ball is configured to easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 corresponding to the 15R jackpot that is the most advantageous for the player among a plurality of types of special game states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot). ing.

Not limited to this, it may be configured to guide the game ball to the entrance part of the type lottery area 408 while avoiding only the lottery by the rotary unit 410 and giving only the right to generate a big win state. .

(j-2) In addition, a movable body is provided in the type lottery area 408, and when the state of the movable body changes to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism unit 741 is avoided, and the game ball is placed in the 15R entrance. 731 may be configured.

(j-3) The rotator unit 410 (rotator 414) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment. For example, the rotating body 414 normally rotating at a constant speed changes its state to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate 650, and the special pocket portion 416a for big wins is positioned at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435. , or the special pocket portion 416a for the big win moves to the position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very low speed.

(j-4) The rotating body 414 includes, for example, a special pocket portion 416a for the 3R jackpot, a special pocket portion 416a for the 7R jackpot, and a special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot. In the (non-advantageous state), the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R big win is controlled to move to a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very high speed, and a game ball is placed against the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R big win. makes it difficult to enter the ball, and when the game ball becomes advantageous based on passing through the special gate 650, the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot is once at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 It may be configured to stop, or to perform control such that the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot moves to a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a normal speed.

(j-5) The type sorting mechanism section 741 (the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment.

For example, the first bridging plate 744 and the second bridging plate 745, which are swinging normally, change their state to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate 650, and temporarily stop at the advance position, or It may be configured such that the game ball can easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 by, for example, increasing the time in the advance position.

(j-6) Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of operating states (advantageous states) of the movable bodies (movable accessory 722, rotating body 414, type sorting mechanism 741, etc.) are set. Alternatively, it may be determined by a lottery result of a predetermined actuation lottery process. The function of determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is put into the operation state (advantageous state) constitutes the operation pattern determining means in the present embodiment.

Furthermore, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. It may be configured such that it is easier to enter a ball into the special ball-entering means (V-winning path 427, 730, etc.) than in the case, and it is easier to win a V-winning big hit. Further, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined type of special game state (for example, the most advantageous 15R jackpot for the player) is likely to occur among a plurality of types of special game states (eg, 15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot).

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when a winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery, during the operation start period before the movable accessory 722 is activated, the effect of the effect display device 42 etc. The means may be configured to be capable of executing an opening effect as a preceding effect suggesting that the movable accessory 722 will be in an operating state.

Incidentally, such an opening effect is performed after the stop display when the variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and the stop display is performed in a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (a configuration in which variable display is not performed), the operation assistance lottery is performed after a winning result is obtained.

(k-1) In addition to the above configuration, in the main controller 261 or the sub-controller 262, production pattern storage means for storing a plurality of production patterns that determine the production time of the opening production, establishment of the operating condition (for example, operation assist A performance pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of performance patterns stored in a performance pattern storage means, and the performance pattern selection means selects one based on the case where a winning result is obtained by lottery. A configuration may also be provided with an effect control means capable of controlling a predetermined effect means based on the produced effect pattern.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make variable the operation start period (for example, opening period) from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operation condition is established) to when the movable accessory 722 is actually in an advantageous state.

(k-2) The operation start period from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operation condition is satisfied) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes advantageous may be made variable without performing the opening effect or the like. .

For example, in the main control device 261, the operation pattern storage means that stores a plurality of operation patterns that determine the operation start period from the time when the operation condition is satisfied until the movable accessory 722 is in the operation state, and the special gate switch 651 The game ball is set. operation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on the detected operation pattern; It may also be configured to include control means capable of controlling the movable accessory 722 based on the above.

(l) Not only game effects using movable bodies such as the movable accessories 722, but also other game effects may be performed.

(l-1) For example, without being guided to the first V winning passage 427, etc., the discharge route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special entrance ball detection switch 462) and the special guidance passage 605 (special gate switch 651) ), when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on detection of a game ball discharged out of the internal area 401, a configuration may be adopted in which specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed. The functions of the main controller 261 and the like that execute such processing constitute the specific processing executing means in this embodiment.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls guided toward the 1st V winning path 427, etc., but also the game balls discharged via the discharge route (second route) are used to impart new game features. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

(l-2) Equipped with counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by ball detection means (ejection ball detection means) such as non-special entry ball detection switch 462 and special gate switch 651, and the count value is predetermined. A predetermined condition is satisfied when the count value is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, or when a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained when the count value is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the predetermined condition is satisfied. , it may be configured to execute a specific process that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, as such specific processing, for example, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state, the processing to lengthen the time in which it is in the operating state, the processing to increase the winning probability in the operation assist lottery, the special pocket portion of the rotating body 414 416a easy to enter the game ball processing, the type lottery area 408 easy to guide the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731, and the like.

(m) The small winning opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the vane member 404 of the central winning unit 37 and the big winning opening opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 are limited to the above embodiments. not a thing

(m-1) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the blade member 404 has two opening/closing patterns of "short win" and "long win". A configuration including one or three or more opening/closing patterns is also possible.

(m-2) In the above embodiment, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds during the "short-time small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds during the "long-time small win". However, one opening mode (opening time) of the blade member 404 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other opening modes with different opening times may be provided.

(m-3) In the above-described embodiment, for one occurrence of a small win (result of one winning lottery performed based on detection of entering a ball by the first start-up prize switch 224a or the second start-up prize switch 224b), the blade member The opening and closing operation (opening operation) of 404 is performed only once (one round), but this is not limiting, and the opening and closing operation of blade member 404 is performed two or more times (multiple times) for each occurrence of a small hit. round).

(m-4) For example, a first opening/closing pattern in which the blade members 404 are opened/closed once (one round) and a second opening/closing pattern in which the blade members 404 are opened/closed twice (two rounds). A configuration in which a plurality of opening/closing patterns with different numbers of opening/closing operations (number of rounds) can be executed, such as the configuration provided with the device, may be employed. However, if a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns (for example, a long small win open for 1.5 seconds) is performed, if the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short time open for 0.5 seconds It is preferable that the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than in the case of a small hit.

(n) Considering the remaining balls in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the above embodiment is configured to perform the remaining ball monitoring process (step S212). Further, in the first display control process (step S205), it is determined whether or not the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open for a small hit. It is configured so as not to end the variable display that has already started.

In place of or in addition to these configurations, the game ball is detected at the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b) while the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open for a small hit. It may be configured not to execute the big winning lottery or the small winning lottery when it is done. In other words, the configuration may be such that the lottery invalid period is set.

Considering the discharge period of the remaining balls, in the lottery invalid period, in addition to the opening period (small hit open period) of the blade member 404 as an open game state, after the opening period (the blade member 404 (post-closure) may be included. Of course, the lottery invalid period is not limited to this, and may be a different period. For example, the period from when the game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33 to when the small winning opening is started may be included in the lottery invalid period. In addition, in a game machine of a type in which a predetermined lottery process is performed even during a predetermined winning state (during opening/closing control of the variable ball entry means), the lottery invalid period is set so that a predetermined opening of the predetermined variable ball entry means is performed. It may be a predetermined period (lottery period) during which it is executed.

In the pachinko machine in which the lottery invalid period is set, for example, before starting the start winning process in step S304, it is determined whether or not it is during the lottery invalid period. In the prize winning process, only the prize ball payout setting (the prize ball command setting) related to the starting prize winning section 33 is performed without storing various counter values such as the win/fail random number counter C1. It is good also as composition which shifts to start prize-winning processing.

Further, when adopting such a configuration, instead of or in addition to the operation assist lottery related to the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), during the lottery invalid period, the start prize winning section 33 (first start prize winning section 33a or the second start winning part 33b), an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722, and if the operation assist lottery is won, the movable A configuration in which the accessory 722 operates may be employed.

In addition, when performing the operation assist lottery related to the start-up winning section 33, the accessory operation lottery area 409 (the special gate 650 and the special gate switch 651) and the related configuration may be omitted.

Here, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11, an example of start-up winning pre-processing that can be executed before starting the start-up winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S7700, it is determined whether or not the lottery invalid period is in effect by referring to a predetermined flag or the like. In this example, the small winning opening period of the central winning unit 37 and the predetermined period after the ending of the small winning opening period are set as the lottery invalid period. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the lottery invalid period, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative in step S7700, that is, if it is the lottery invalid period, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b. It is determined by detection information of the starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b. When a negative determination is made in step S7701, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S7701, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting winning portion 33a or the second starting winning portion 33b, in step S7702, the third display flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the special gate display device 44 is in the process of changing display. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7702, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, it is determined in step S7703 whether or not the accessory in operation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting winning process of step S304.

As a result, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 and during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize winning portion 33b, and the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion. Even if it is detected by the winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, the operation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball newly wins the first start winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b, and the first starting A configuration may be provided with holding means (variation holding area) capable of holding variable display (operation assist lottery results) for a predetermined number of times when detected by the prize winning switch 224a or the second starting prize winning switch 224b.

Here, the holding means (variation holding area) includes, for example, one execution area and a plurality of In the plurality of reservation areas, each value of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 is chronologically set in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the start winning parts 33a and 33b. may be stored in . Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2, and other information may be stored.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7703 is negative, in step S7704, the values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 are changed to the lottery invalidation set in the RAM 503. Store in the random number storage area for the period.

In the next step S7705, the starting prize determination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned on, and in step S7706, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 newly stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period is the value corresponding to the assist winning. A suitability determination process is performed to determine whether or not. Here, when the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 is a value corresponding to the winning of the assist, that is, the case of winning the act assist corresponds to the case where the predetermined condition in this example is satisfied.

In this example, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period. Specifically, "1 to 5" among the numerical values "0 to 19" of the actuation assist random number counter C4 are the winning values. That is, the assist winning probability is 5/20. Of course, the configuration is not limited to this, and assist winning may be performed with a different winning probability.

In the following step S7707, the variable time for determining the variable time in the invalid period display device (not shown) constituting the second display means is based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period. A determination process is performed, and then this process ends. Therefore, the second fluctuation pattern selection means in this example is configured by the function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S7707.

The correspondence between the value of the variable time selection counter C2 and the variable time in the invalid period display device is stored in advance in the ROM 502 as a variable time selection table for the invalid lottery period (not shown). Therefore, the ROM 502 for storing the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the second variation pattern storage means in this example.

For example, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is one of "0 to 2" out of "0 to 9", the variable time of the variable display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 3 seconds. If it is any one of "3 to 5", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 5 seconds, and if it is any of "6 to 9" , the variation time of the variation display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 7 seconds.

Next, the fourth display control process performed in the normal process of FIG. 10 in relation to the invalid period display device will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the fourth display control process constitutes the second display control means in this example.

First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not variable display is being performed by the invalid period display device by looking at the setting status of the fourth display flag indicating whether variable display is being performed by the invalid period display device. . Specifically, when the fourth display flag is ON, it is considered that the invalid period display device is performing variable display, and when the fourth display flag is OFF, the variable display is performed on the invalid period display device. It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped. The invalid period display device and the special gate display device 44 may be shared.

If the determination in step S7801 is negative, the process advances to step S7802 to determine whether or not the starting award determination flag for the lottery invalid period is ON. If the determination in step S7802 is negative, that is, if the start prize determination flag for the lottery invalid period is not ON, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the start winning judgment flag for the lottery invalid period is ON, the flow advances to step S7803 to turn off the starting winning judgment flag for the lottery invalid period. In subsequent step S7804, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display in the invalid period display device have been met. Specifically, the fourth display flag is turned on, and the fourth display timer is set. The fourth display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the invalid period display device, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, the fourth display timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time determined in the variable time determination process of step S7707. That is, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds, the value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds, or the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the fourth display timer.

After the end of step S7804, the fourth display control process ends. In addition, based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting variable display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process of the normal process, the invalid period display device , the variable display is started.

If the determination in step S7801 is affirmative, that is, if the invalid period display device is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S7806 to perform fourth display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the fourth display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S7807, it is determined whether or not the count value of the fourth display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If the determination in step S7807 is affirmative, the fourth display flag is turned off in step S7808, and in step S7809 stop display setting is performed to perform stop display on the invalid period display device. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal is output to the invalid period display device to perform stop display in the external output processing in the next normal processing.

Subsequently, the flow advances to step S7810 to perform determination information setting processing, and terminates this processing. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory operating flag is turned on, and the operating time is set to the accessory operating timer. In this embodiment, a value "3000" corresponding to 12 seconds is set for the accessory action timer. Thereby, the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state). The function of the main control device 261 that performs the driving process of the movable accessory 722 based on this setting content constitutes the movable body control means in this example.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7807 is negative, in step S7811, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the invalid period display device, and this processing ends. Then, based on the contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the invalid period display device. As a result, the variable display of the invalid period display device is realized at the timing of the fourth display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Therefore, the actuation lottery process (operation assist lottery) in this example is constituted by the random number storage process (storage of the actuation assist random number counter C4) in step S7704 and the success/failure determination process in step S7706. The function of the device 261 constitutes lottery processing execution means (invalid period lottery processing execution means).

The function of the main controller 261 that executes the random number storage process (storage of the variable time selection counter C2) in step S7704 and the variable time determination process in step S7707 constitutes the set time selection means in this example.

As described above, according to this example, the small winning opening period in which the central winning unit 37 is caused to perform a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning section 33 and the end of the small winning opening period The later predetermined period (during the remaining ball monitoring period) is set as a lottery invalid period, and whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 when a game ball newly enters the start winning part 33 within the lottery invalid period is determined. An actuation assist lottery is held to decide, and the movable accessory 722 is activated when the actuation assist lottery is won.

As a result, even during the opening period of the central winning unit 37, in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable accessory 722 performs a predetermined action based on the entry of the game ball into the start winning section 33. Advantageous conditions can arise.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33, at the opening timing of the central prize winning unit 37 related to the starting ball entering, some players know that the game ball does not win V prizes. Some players temporarily stop shooting game balls during the period when the winning unit 37 is open so that the game balls do not wastefully enter the starting winning section 33 .

On the other hand, according to the present example, even in such a situation after the game ball enters the starting prize winning portion 33, the player can newly start winning in order to be assisted by the movable accessory 722. Since game balls are required to enter the portion 33 and the game balls are continuously shot, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33 is during the opening period of the central prize winning unit 37, the diversification of the game can be achieved.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In addition, under the configuration according to this example, when a relatively small value is set for the accessory operation timer and the fourth display timer, immediately after the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 during the predetermined lottery invalid period. Then, the movable accessory 722 becomes operable, and the movable accessory 722 can act on the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 during the small winning opening before the lottery invalid period.

On the other hand, when a relatively large value is set for the accessory operation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable accessory 722 is applied to the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 after the predetermined lottery invalid period ends. It becomes the structure which can act. As a result, even if the game ball does not exist in the internal area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37 at the time when the game ball enters the starting prize winning portion 33 within the lottery invalid period, the center is opened at a predetermined timing thereafter. A game ball entering the winning unit 37 is acted upon by the movable accessory 722, and a chance of winning V is given.

As a result, the player actively tries to make the game ball enter the central prize winning unit 37 even after confirming that the game ball has entered the starting prize winning section 33 within the lottery invalid period. It is possible to play games. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional problem A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, the movable body performs a predetermined action regularly or continuously regardless of the game, or the movable body moves every time the variable ball entry means is opened. The performance related to the movable body becomes monotonous, such as the player performing a predetermined action, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this regard, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means A1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
Trigger ball entry means provided so that a game ball can enter (or pass through);
a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means;
lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection means;
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above means A1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, whether or not to place the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state is determined by a lottery. As a result, for example, the movable body does not always operate regularly or continuously, and the variable ball entry means does not open. , it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance related to the movable body, and to increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable body.

In particular, in this means, determination as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process). As a result, there is no need to newly provide a complicated mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism for performing lottery based on the behavior of game balls, and the configuration can be simplified.

Here, the arrangement position of the "opportunity ball-entering means" may be, for example, "within the internal area of the variable ball-entering means", "within an area different from the internal area of the variable ball-entering means", or "within the above-mentioned "within the game area outside the variable ball entry means" and the like.

Means A2. The game machine according to means A1, wherein the trigger ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter.

According to the above means A2, by providing the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area can be detected. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, etc., so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which will further enhance interest. can be improved.

Incidentally, if the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball entry detection means may be performed using a wire rod or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as erroneous detection by the means and activation of the movable body are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the means A2, by providing the opportunity ball-entering means in the inner region of the variable ball-entering means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

Means A3. The gaming machine according to means A1 or A2, wherein a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered).

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means A3, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. can be done.

Means A4. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A3, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, if all of these game balls are directed toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means A4, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

It should be noted that "the first flow route (the first route) that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, and the game ball that has passed through the specific area is the first route. In the case of a configuration including a second downstream route (second said first route) that can flow down to said special ball entry means with a higher probability than a downstream route (first said first route), the whole As a result, the proportion of game balls flowing down to the special ball entry means increases. It must be set, and there is a risk that the interest of the player will be reduced.

Means A5. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means A5, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entering means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the above means A5, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means A5 is set to "open and close in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means A1 to A4, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the above means A5 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means A6. display means for starting a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
The movable body control means is
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A5, wherein after the stop display is made on the display means, the control for placing the movable body in the predetermined advantageous state can be executed.

If the movable body were to suddenly operate without warning, the player, who had not watched the movable body until then, would not be able to grasp the situation and might be confused.

On the other hand, according to the means A6, by providing the display means, the player can be made aware in advance of the possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in the game presentation using the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

Means A7. Variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different time periods for the variation display;
variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of the game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
The gaming machine according to means A6, further comprising display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means.

According to the means A7, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the display means can be made variable. As a result, it is possible to make variable the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state.

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

Means A8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means A8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means A9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means A10. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A9, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means A11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means A1 to A10 is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means A11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem B. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there are effects related to the movable body, such as the movable body periodically or continuously performing a predetermined action regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. It became monotonous, and the player's interest in the movable body tended to fade. In this regard, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means B1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above means B1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area can be detected. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Incidentally, if the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball entry detection means may be performed using a wire rod or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as erroneous detection by the means and activation of the movable body are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the present means, by providing the opportunity ball-entering means in the inner region of the variable ball-entering means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

Means B2. Provided with a predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The gaming machine according to means B1, wherein the trigger ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the predetermined detection means, where the game ball detected by the predetermined detection means can be entered. .

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined motion based on detection by the predetermined detection means, the movable body moves at the same timing every time the game ball enters the variable ball entry means (internal area). It will be done.

As a result, the presentation related to the movable body becomes monotonous, and the player easily grasps the movement timing of the movable body.

On the other hand, according to the means B2, it is possible to suppress monotony of the presentation related to the movable body, and to suppress the fraudulent act as described above.

Means B3. a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered by the trigger ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, wherein the operating condition can be established when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means.

According to the above means B3, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movable body should be placed in a predetermined advantageous state by a software-based lottery process, so that the control process can be simplified.

Means B4. a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means;
a lottery process executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball detection by the triggered ball ball detection means;
A game machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above means B4, determination as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means B5. A game according to any one of means B1 to B4, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) said trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to said special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means B5, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means B6. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B5, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, if all of these game balls are directed toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means B6, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Means B7. A gaming machine according to means B6, characterized by comprising a plurality of said second routes configured so that the time required for a game ball to reach said opportunity ball entry means from said route sorting means is different.

If the movable body were configured to move at a constant timing every time when the game ball was distributed by the route distribution means, the performance related to the movable body would become monotonous and the player would be able to move the movable body. It becomes easy to grasp the movement timing of the body, and there is a possibility that cheating such as vibrating the game machine according to the timing is performed.

On the other hand, according to the above means B7, it is possible to make the operation start period variable from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means until the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

In addition, ``the time required for a game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route distribution means is different'' includes, for example, ``the distance from the route distribution means to the trigger ball entry means is different''. included.

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes". may move toward one occasional ball-entering means (incentive ball-entering detection means) and be detected by the same occasional ball-entering detection means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means B8. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. the second route having a long advantageous state arrival time until the game ball reaches the triggered ball entry means (the triggered ball entry detection means) and the movable body attains a predetermined advantageous state from the time point of the first and second routes; The gaming machine according to means B6, further comprising a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means, the time from the time the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body. When the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to reach an advantageous state for a long time until it reaches a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the following second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is shortened, two internal regions of the variable ball entry means are arranged. When the game balls enter continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distributing means, and the second following game ball is distributed to the first route, the comparison is performed. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a long period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced. .

On the other hand, according to the means B8, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball takes either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time" or "the second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time". Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

Means B9. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means B9, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means is special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the above means B9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means B9 is set so that "when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, it is opened and closed in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of the means B1 to B8, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that the configuration of the above means B9, under the configuration of each of the above means, is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means B10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means B10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means B11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means B10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means B12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B11, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means B13. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means B1 to B12, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means B13, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem C. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, for example, when a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time in succession, these plurality of game balls Depending on the ball entry timing, all of the plurality of game balls are directed to the special ball entry means, or all of the plurality of game balls are not directed to the special ball entry means and are guided to the discharge section or non-special ball entry means. It was a configuration that easily caused a problem such as being put away.

Normally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, even if a game ball newly enters the special ball entry means in a state in which the right to the special game state is obtained, the special game state is not granted for that amount. It is configured.

Therefore, even if two game balls continuously enter the special ball entry means, two special game states are not given, and only one special game state occurs. Therefore, the player may have negative feelings such as loss, waste, waste, and the like.

As a result, it is feared that the player loses interest in the game even though a situation favorable to the player, such as the provision of a special game state, has occurred.

Conversely, when all of the plurality of game balls are guided to the discharge section or the like, since a plurality of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, the game is sent to the special ball entry means. There is a risk that this will not contribute to the player's sense of expectation that it will work in favor of hitting the ball, and that interest will decrease.

In this sense, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to dramatically improve interest when a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. To provide a game machine capable of

Means C1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down to the first route (can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means C1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is provided with a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of a game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route. The movable body is provided because it is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such as the following second game ball flowing down the other route. The action effect will be more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation that a plurality of game balls may be entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, thereby increasing the expectation of occurrence of the special game state.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first preceding game ball and the second following game ball flow down? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means C2. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means capable of maintaining the route sorting means in the first state;
When a game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means maintained in the first state, the force received from the game ball changes the route sorting means to the second state. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that

Under the configuration related to the means C2, in order to operate the movable body, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means. It is necessary to change the sorting means to the second state and guide the game ball to the second route.

In other words, in order to operate the movable body, at least two game balls are continuously entered into the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball is moved by the route distribution means maintained in the first state. After flowing down to the first route, the following second game ball needs to flow down to the second route by the route sorting means changed to the second state.

As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of game balls than to enter one game ball into the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby ensuring the game performance. can be done.

As a more specific configuration of the means C2, for example, "Means C2. The route sorting means
A route distributing member configured to be changeable between a first posture in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
Maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in the first posture,
When a game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distribution member (for example, to resist the biasing force of biasing means). and) the gaming machine according to means C1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to change to the second posture. and so on.

Means C3. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. From the point of time when the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time for reaching an advantageous state is shortened. The gaming machine according to means C2 for

If the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means, the time from the time the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body. When the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches an advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is long, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, the player enters the movable body. Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing of the operation, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the means C3, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

The above-mentioned "advantageous state arrival time" should be shorter than the above-mentioned "movable body arrival time". This is intended to include a configuration in which the distance is zero, etc.).

Also, in order to lengthen the "movable body reaching time", for example, lengthening the movement distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first route" can be considered as an example.

Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the "first route". Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a crew, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a rib or the like to stop the momentum of the game ball and delay the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

In addition, "from the point in time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means, the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means), and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state. After that, the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means until the game ball reaches the movable body than the advantageous end arrival time until the advantageous state ends It is preferable to be configured so that the arrival time is short.

If the "movable body reaching time" is longer than the "advantageous end reaching time", two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entering means continuously, and the preceding first game is played. When the ball is sorted to the first route by the route sorting means and the subsequent second game ball is sorted to the second route, the game ball is released after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends. reaches the movable body, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Means C4. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
At least a state changeable between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
The game machine according to means C1, further comprising a distribution drive means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball is always distributed to either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent game ball is assigned to either the first route or the second route. When the second game ball is distributed to the other route, the relationship between the preset "advantageous state arrival time" and the "movable body arrival time" allows continuous input. At the time when the two game balls are alternately distributed by the route distribution means, the result after that is decided, so there is a possibility that the interest of the player may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the means C4, even if two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball is the first route or the second route. Since it is not decided which way to distribute, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

As a result, the player can keep an eye on the behavior of the game ball with a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of the special game state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

Means C5. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
At least a state changeable between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means capable of maintaining the route sorting means in a reference state between the first state and the second state;
In a state in which the route sorting means is maintained in the reference state, game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means maintained in the reference state, the force received from the game ball causes the route sorting means to change to the second state,
When a game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means maintained in the reference state, the route sorting means is changed to the first state by the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that

According to the means C5, the same effects as those of the means C4 can be obtained. In particular, according to this means, since it is not necessary to provide a driving means for driving the route sorting means, while adopting a relatively simple configuration, a plurality of (two) game balls that continuously flow down are alternately distributed. Configurations can be implemented to flow down different routes. As a result, simplification of the configuration and control, compactness, etc. can be achieved.

As a more specific configuration of the means C5, for example, "means C5. The route sorting means
A route distributing member configured to be able to change its posture between at least a first posture that allows game balls to flow down to the first route and a second posture that allows game balls to flow down to the second route,
Maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in a reference posture between the first posture and the second posture,
In a state in which the route distribution member is maintained in the reference posture, game balls can flow down either of the first route and the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distributing member maintained in the reference posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distributing member to change to the second posture,
When a game ball flows down to the second route by the route distributing member maintained in the reference posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distributing member to change to the first posture. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that and so on.

Means C6. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. from the point in time when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body attains an advantageous state; The gaming machine according to means C4 or C5, further comprising a second route in which the advantageous state reaching time is shorter than the body reaching time.

If the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means, the time from the time the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body. When the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches an advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is long, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, the player enters the movable body. Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing of the operation, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the time required for the movable body to reach the advantageous state is shortened, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball following is distributed to the first route, a relatively long Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the means C6, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball takes either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either ``the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time'' or the ``second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time''. Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the ``first said second route'' and the ``second said second route''. A game ball passing through the first said second route or the second said second route respectively moves toward one opportunity ball entry means (event ball entry detection means), and the same opportunity ball entry detection means. It is good also as a structure detected by a means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means C7. A game according to any one of the means C1 to C6, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means C7, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means C8. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means C8, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means C8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means C8 is set to "open and close in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means C1 to C7, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration related to the above means C8, the time from when the game ball enters the triggering ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the movable body after the start of operation By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means C9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means C9, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means C10. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means C10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means C11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means C12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means C1 to C11, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means C12, even during the open game state (during the opening period of the variable ball entry means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem D. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing every time when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entering means.

Therefore, conventionally, there is a possibility that the player will grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body, and commit fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, the production related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, and in this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing cheating and improving interest.

Means D1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
Movable body control capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by predetermined ball detection means). means and
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from at least a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is established) to when the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the means D1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, the period (for example, the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is satisfied) until the movable body actually enters a predetermined advantageous state is variable, so that the movable body Since there is no need to perform actions at fixed timings, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game presentation using the movable bodies. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

Means D2. a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered by the trigger ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means D1, wherein the operation condition can be established based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball-entering detection means.

If the triggering ball entry means that triggers the movement of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the triggering ball entry detection means will make an erroneous detection using a wire rod or the like, and the movable body will be activated. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as

On the other hand, according to the means D2, the movement of the game ball entering the internal area causes the movable body to operate, so that the occurrence of the above-described problems can be suppressed.

Here, for example, if it is set as "a configuration in which the operating condition is established when the game ball is detected by the above-mentioned triggered ball-entering detection means", the determination of whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state is made by software. Since there is no need to execute the random lottery process, the control process can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraud such as installing an illegal ROM or the like in which the program related to the lottery process is altered.

Means D3. operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that define an operation start period from at least when the operation condition is established until the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state;
operation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means; The game machine according to means D2 characterized by:

According to the above means D3, a plurality of patterns of operation start periods (for example, opening periods) are prepared, and a predetermined operation start period is selected from among these patterns by software. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the means D1 and the like.

Furthermore, according to this means, it is not necessary to provide the variable ball-entering means with a complicated mechanical selection mechanism, and the structure of the variable ball-entering means can be simplified.

Means D4. production means capable of executing a preceding production (opening production) suggesting that at least the movable body is in the predetermined advantageous state during the operation start period;
production pattern storage means for storing a plurality of production patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns;
A gaming machine according to means D3, further comprising an effect control means capable of controlling the effect means based on an effect pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

According to the above means D4, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state by performing a preceding effect suggesting that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. .

Furthermore, the player is nervous without knowing when the movable body will reach a predetermined advantageous state, but with a sense of expectation that the movable body will reach a predetermined advantageous state at a timing that is advantageous to him. Along with the behavior of the game ball, it is possible to pay attention to the game performance related to the movable body, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

In addition, in a configuration in which the operation start period from when the operating condition is established until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state is variable, when the operation start period becomes relatively long, the operating condition is satisfied. However, there is a risk that the player will feel uneasiness and resentment that the movable body will not be in a predetermined advantageous state.

On the other hand, according to the present means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such troubles, and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

Means D5. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D4, wherein the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process. .

According to the above-mentioned means D5, the decision as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is determined by means of software by means of the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means D6. display means for starting a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
Variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different time periods for the variation display;
variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of the game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
Display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means is
The game machine according to any one of means D2 to D5, wherein control is executable to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is made on the display means.

According to the means D6, by providing the display means, the player can be made to recognize in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player, while not knowing whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, has a sense of anticipation that it will be in an advantageous state, and watches the movement of the game ball and the variable display. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game presentation related to the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the above means D6, it is possible to make the variable time from when the variable display is started until the stop display is performed on the display means variable. As a result, it is possible to make variable the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the means D1 and the like.

Means D7. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route.

If a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a continuous ball state in which two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval between them. Similarly.), etc., even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, if all of these game balls go toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body becomes, There is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means D7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity" may be that the game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means.

Means D8. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
Distributing driving means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation to change the state of the route distributing means,
A means D7 characterized by comprising a plurality of said second routes configured so that the time required for a game ball passing through said specific area from said route sorting means to said opportunity ball entry means is different. The game machine described.

If the movable body were configured to move at a constant timing every time when the game ball was distributed by the route distribution means, the performance related to the movable body would become monotonous and the player would be able to move the movable body. It becomes easy to grasp the movement timing of the body, and there is a possibility that cheating such as vibrating the game machine according to the timing is performed.

On the other hand, according to the means D8, by providing a plurality of second routes, it is possible to make the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distributing means to when the opportunity ball entering means be variable.

As a result, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means (predetermined timing) to when the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

In addition, according to this means, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means to when the trigger ball entry means can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball. Players will be able to watch the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further improving the interest.

In addition, ``the time required for a game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route distribution means is different'' includes, for example, ``the distance from the route distribution means to the trigger ball entry means is different''. included.

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes". may move toward one occasional ball-entering means (incentive ball-entering detection means) and be detected by the same occasional ball-entering detection means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means D9. As the plurality of second routes,
The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. The second route having a long advantageous state arrival time until the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state from the time point of the first and second routes. , and the second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means, the time from the time the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body. When the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to reach an advantageous state for a long time until it reaches a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the following second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is shortened, two internal regions of the variable ball entry means are arranged. When the game balls enter continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distributing means, and the second following game ball is distributed to the first route, the comparison is performed. Unless the movable body is maintained in a predetermined advantageous state for a long period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced. There is

On the other hand, according to the means D9, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball goes to either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time" or "the second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time". Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

It should be noted that the ``second said second route'' may be shorter than the ``first said second route'' in terms of the time required for the game ball to pass through. It is intended to include a configuration in which the ball is entered (such as a configuration in which the distance to the opportunity ball entry means is zero).

In addition, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball to pass through the "first and second route", for example, lengthening the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first and second route" is one example. can be considered as

Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying passage of the game ball is installed in the "first second route". Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a crew, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a rib or the like to stop the momentum of the game ball and delay the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

Furthermore, by installing the delay means as described above in the "first route", the game ball flowing down to the first route can be moved longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the "second route". A configuration may be adopted in which the movable body reaching the body takes a long time.

Means D10. A game according to any one of means D2 to D9, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) said trigger ball entering means cannot flow down (cannot enter) to said special ball entering means. machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means D10, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means D11. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means D11, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means D11, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means D11 is set to "open and close during the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means D2 to D10, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

In addition, the configuration related to the above means D11 is, under the configuration related to each of the above means, the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means until the movable body starts to operate, and the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means D12. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means D12, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means D13. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means D13, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means D14. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D13, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means D15. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means D1 to D14, characterized by being capable of executing control to put the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means D15, even during the open game state (during the opening period of the variable ball entry means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable body is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem E. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

In such a pachinko machine, for example, a guide route is provided for directing a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means toward the special ball entry means, and a game ball that has deviated from the guide route is guided to the internal area. Some are equipped with a deviating route (ejection route) for discharging to the outside.

However, in the conventional art, even though the game ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball was once deviated from the guidance route and guided to the deviation route, and then entered the variable ball entry means. It did not contribute to the game of the game, and was just discharged. In this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means E1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first route (guidance route) that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route (discharge route) capable of discharging game balls that do not flow down to the first route outside the internal region;
ball detection means (ejection ball detection means) capable of detecting game balls that have passed through the second route;
a specific processing execution means capable of executing specific processing advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means.

According to the above means E1, based on the detection of the game ball ejected through the second route (ejection route), specific processing advantageous to the player is executed, such as facilitating the occurrence of a special game state. be done.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means via the first route (guide route), but also the game balls discharged via the second route can be used to create new gameplay. can be given, and it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E2. The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein the predetermined condition is established when the game ball is detected by the ball detecting means.

According to the above means E2, every time the game ball is detected by the ball detection means, the specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed, so that the interest of the player can be dramatically improved. .

Means E3. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process based on the detection by the ball detection means;
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

According to the above means E3, the specific processing advantageous to the player is not executed each time the game ball is detected by the ball detecting means, so that the specific processing is suppressed from becoming monotonous and the specific processing is executed. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for that. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E4. counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means;
The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein the predetermined condition is established when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number or more.

According to the means E4, even when the number of game balls flowing out of the first route (guidance route) and flowing into the second route (discharge route) is relatively large, the decrease in interest of the player is suppressed. be able to.

Means E5. a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means;
a lottery process executing means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number or more;
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

According to the above means E5, every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means exceeds the predetermined number, the specific processing advantageous to the player is not executed, so the same operation as the above means E3 is performed. effect is played.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, Equipped with a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball),
The specific process executing means is
Any one of the means E1 to E5, characterized by comprising movable body control means capable of executing control to put the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body performs a predetermined action when the predetermined condition is satisfied. game machine.

According to the means E6, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means E7. A route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The game machine according to means E6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration related to the means E6, for example, when the predetermined condition is about to be established, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entering means at the same time (two game balls are almost spaced apart) The same applies hereinafter.), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, all of these game balls are the second route (discharge route), even if the movable body is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a single game ball will not enter the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the above means E7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or Since it is possible to make one game ball go to the first route such that one game ball flows down one of the second routes and the second game ball that follows flows down to the other route, the movable body The action and effect provided will be more successful.

As a result, the player comes to pay attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation, thereby further improving interest.

Means E8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A gaming machine according to means E6 or E7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means E8, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so that a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means E9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is easily determined by the type determining means. game machine.

According to the means E9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means E10. When the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the movable body after the game ball. A game machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that it is configured to be operable.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means E10, the game balls other than the game balls entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game balls involved (last) in the establishment of the predetermined condition are also more expensive. A chance to enter the special ball entry means will be given with a probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition did not enter the variable ball entry means, or the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the prescribed condition did not enter the variable entry means. Even if the other game ball that entered the ball means did not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means after that entered the special ball entry means with a higher probability. You will be given a chance to hit the ball.

As a result, even after confirming that the predetermined condition has been established, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Therefore, the means E10 is defined as "when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the opening state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball has passed has been opened. The game machine according to any one of the means E6 to E9, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during the open state period." .

In addition, in the configuration related to the above means E10, under the configuration related to each of the above means, the time from the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the movable body starts to operate, the operation period of the movable body after the operation starts, etc. are adjusted. By doing so, it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means E11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means E6 to E10, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-described means E11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Conventional problem F. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, since the conventional variable ball entry means has a plurality of winning openings (specific areas) such as left and right sides, game balls may enter the variable ball entry means from multiple directions at the same time. there were.

Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a timing advantageous to the player, depending on the ball entry timing of the game balls, they interfere with each other, and even one ball enters the game as a special entry. If the game ball does not go to the ball means, the game ball does not flow down to the route desired by the player, and the interest of the player may decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means F1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that do not flow down to the first route to flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
A state changeable between an advantageous state (special state) that is at least advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is not more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state is provided, and the game ball that has flowed down to the first route is provided. a movable body that can cause a change in behavior (that can act on a game ball);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; with
The specific area is provided only at one location through which game balls can pass one by one,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided only at one location.

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means F1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body is moved to the predetermined position based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. Since it is determined whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is provided with a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of a game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route. The movable body is provided because it is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such as the following second game ball flowing down the other route. The action effect will be more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation that a plurality of game balls may be entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, thereby increasing the expectation of occurrence of the special game state.

In addition, in this means, the specific area is provided in only one place through which the game balls can pass one by one, and the ball passage through which the game balls can be guided one by one to the specific area is provided in only one place. Therefore, game balls can be properly guided to the route sorting means one by one. As a result, the above effects can be achieved more reliably.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first preceding game ball and the second following game ball flow down? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means F2. A game machine according to means F1, wherein a game ball that does not pass through the ball passage cannot pass through the specific area.

If a game ball that does not pass through the ball passage is configured to be able to pass through the specific area, other game balls that pass through the ball passage and flow down toward the specific area may interfere with On the other hand, according to the means F2, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area unless it passes through the ball passage. can.

Means F3. The game machine according to means F1 or F2, wherein the ball passage is provided on either the left side or the right side of the opening/closing member outside the variable ball entry means.

According to the means F3, the game balls can be guided to the opening/closing member one by one. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem such as a plurality of game balls entering the opening/closing member at the same time and being bitten.

Means F4. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, wherein the ball passage is provided so that only game balls fired with a predetermined intensity by the shooting means can pass through.

According to the means F4, the ball passage is provided only at a position (for example, the right side of the variable ball entry means) through which only the game ball fired with a predetermined strength (for example, right-handed) by the shooting means can pass. It is possible to further enhance the effects of the means F1 and the like.

Means F5. Means F1 to F4, characterized in that, in the specific area, while permitting passage of game balls in a predetermined direction, restricting means for restricting passage of game balls in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball passage continuously, due to the behavior of the preceding first game ball, the preceding first game ball and the following game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as the collision of the second game ball and the like, which hinder each other. As a result, the operational effects of the means F1 and the like can be further enhanced. Here, the regulating means includes those that change the state from the first state to the second state by the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. A game according to any one of the means F1 to F5, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means F6, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. can be done.

Means F7. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means F7, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means is special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means F7, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means F7 is set to "open and close during the open state period following the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the means F7 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means F8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of means F1 to F7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means F8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means F9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means F9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means F10. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means F11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means F1 to F10, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means F11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem G. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional game machine, the performance related to the movable body is monotonous, such as the movable body performing a predetermined action every time the game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this regard, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means G1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first opportunity ball-entering detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first opportunity ball-entering means;
a second trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a second opportunity ball-entering detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second opportunity ball-entering means;
a first flow-down route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means;
a second flow-down route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means;
Route distribution means (downstream route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first flow route or the second flow route;
A movable body provided to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball passing through the specific area. and,
Predetermined advantageous state for causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball-entering means or the second ball-entering means. and a movable body control means capable of executing control to
In a specific state, the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can occur is different between when the game ball flows down the first flow-down route and when the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. Characteristic game machine.

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the first trigger ball-entering means or the second trigger ball-entering means'', for example, ``the first trigger ball-entering When a game ball is detected by the ball detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means" or "based on ball entry detection by the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means a predetermined operation lottery is performed, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery.

According to the means G1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, by providing various trigger ball entry means (various trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball entering the internal area is detected. Since it is determined whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state based on the behavior, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state can occur differs between when the game ball flows down the first flow-down route and when the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. there is As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further improving the interest.

Means G2. The time or distance required for the game ball that has passed through the specific region to flow down the first flow route and reach the first trigger ball entry means, and the game ball that has passed through the specific region is the second The game machine according to means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required for flowing down the flow-down route to reach the second opportunity ball-entering means is different.

According to the means G2, the period until the movable body can be in a predetermined advantageous state is variable depending on whether the game ball flows down the first flow-down route or the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. can be

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Means G3. The gaming machine according to means G1 or G2, further comprising delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball in the first flow route or the second flow route.

According to the means G3, even if the length of the first flow-down route or the length of the second flow-down route is relatively short, by providing the above-mentioned delay means, the time until the game ball reaches the predetermined position can be reduced. can be relatively long. As a result, the game space can be used effectively. Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a crew, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a rib or the like to stop the momentum of the game ball and delay the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

Means G4. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on ball entry detection by the first ball-entrance detection means or the second ball-entrance detection means;
At least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process, the predetermined operation condition is established,
In the specific state, the rate at which the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the case where the game ball is detected by the first triggered ball entry detection means and the case where the game ball is detected by the second triggered ball entry detection means. , are configured differently.

According to the above means G4, determination as to whether or not the movable body should be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, the ratio of obtaining a predetermined lottery result between the case where the game ball is detected by the first opportunity ball-entering detection means and the case where the game ball is detected by the second opportunity-entering ball detection means is Since they are configured differently, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which can further improve the amusement.

Means G5. The route sorting means is
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first flow route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second flow route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4, wherein in the specific state, the ratio of the route sorting means to be in the first state and the ratio to be in the second state are different.

According to the above means G5, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, so that the interest can be further improved. can. In addition, the ratio of the route sorting means to be in the first state and the ratio of the route to be in the second state may be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. a predetermined route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
route distribution means (upstream side route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route in the specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G5, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the predetermined route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, if all of these game balls are directed toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means G6, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball enters the predetermined route, or , the game ball flows down one of the first flow route or the second flow route, and the following second game ball flows down the other route. Since it is possible to direct both of them, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Means G7. A game ball that has entered (or passed through) the triggering ball-entering means (the first triggering ball-entering means and/or the second triggering ball-entering means) cannot flow down to the special ball-entering means (cannot enter) The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G6, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means G7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means G8. When the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), after the game ball, The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G7, wherein the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the specific area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means G8, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means G8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area A ball) flows down a predetermined route, or either the first flow route or the second flow route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route. Then, after that, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow route or the second flow route enters the opportunity ball entry means (first opportunity ball entry means or second opportunity ball entry means) to form a movable body. is activated, at the time the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined route passes through the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet activated and the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined route has not entered the special ball entry means. After that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passed through the specific area after that) flows down to a predetermined route, and by the action of the movable body, a special It is also possible to provide a configuration in which a chance to enter the ball into the ball entering means is given.

Therefore, the means G8 is defined as "when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball-entering means (the first opportunity ball-entering means or the second opportunity ball-entering means), the game Any one of the means G1 to G7 characterized in that the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in the open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the ball has passed. The game machine described in .

In addition, under the configuration related to the above means G8, the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and the time from when the movable body starts to operate By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means G9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G8, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means G9, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means G10. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means G10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means G11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means G12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means G1 to G11, characterized by being capable of executing control to make the movable body perform the predetermined action as the benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means G12, even during the open game state (during the opening period of the variable ball entry means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the past, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem H. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing every time when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entering means.

For this reason, conventionally, there is a possibility that the player will grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body, and commit fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, the production related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, and in this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing cheating and improving interest.

Means H1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
Behavior of a game ball that has passed through the specific area is provided so as to be changeable between an advantageous state (special state) that is at least advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. A movable body that can cause a change in (can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; ,
and opening/closing pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of opening/closing patterns is to be executed when performing opening/closing control of the opening/closing member.

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means H1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body is moved to the predetermined position based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. Since it is determined whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing a plurality of opening and closing patterns of the variable ball entry means (opening and closing member), the timing at which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means changes. Even if it is configured to operate at a fixed timing, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means will differ. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating such as vibrating the game machine in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body.

When changing the rate of entering a ball into the special means, for example, a method of providing a plurality of operation patterns of the movable bodies and changing the selection probability of the patterns to change the rate of entering a ball into the special means. However, it is also possible to change the action mode of the movable body that changes the behavior of the game ball by performing a predetermined action, and adjust the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means to the desired ball entry rate. The work is very difficult, and it is necessary to repeat trial and error many times. In this regard, according to this means, it is possible to more easily change the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means.

Means H2. When a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns is performed, the movable body is more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed. The game machine according to the means H1 characterized by the above.

According to the above means H2, for example, when a predetermined opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing member is opened at a relatively high rate is performed, it is possible to enter more game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the structure in which the movable body is likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation for entering the ball into the special ball entering means is increased, and the player's expectation for the special game state can perform. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H3. lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entering the opportunity ball entry means;
display means for starting a variable display based on the entry of a ball into the triggering ball entry means and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
holding means capable of holding the variable display on the display means for a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to means H1 or H2, characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the means H3, since the movable body does not move every time in accordance with a predetermined trigger, the effects of the means H1 and the like are enhanced, and the production related to the movable body is suppressed from becoming monotonous. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for body movement.

In addition, in this means, the frequency with which the movable body operates can be increased by providing the retaining means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H4. Any one of the means H1 to H3, characterized by comprising operation pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is placed in the advantageous state. The game machine described.

According to the means H4, by providing a plurality of operation patterns of the movable body, it is possible to further enhance the effects of the means H1 and the like. Although it is very difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means to the desired ball entry rate, on the other hand, the behavior of the game ball is diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest, as described above. fraudulent behavior can be curbed.

Means H5. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, wherein at least one of the plurality of opening/closing patterns includes a plurality of opening/closing operations.

According to the above means H5, since the ratio of opening the opening/closing member becomes relatively large, more game balls can be entered into the variable ball entering means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation for the ball entering the special ball-entering means.

Means H6. Means H5, characterized in that at least one opening/closing operation among the plurality of opening/closing operations has an opening time longer than the game ball shooting interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) by the shooting means. game machine.

According to the means H6, the effect of the means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, if all of these game balls are directed toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means H7, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first preceding game ball and the second following game ball flow down? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means H8. A game according to any one of the means H1 to H7, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means H8, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means H9. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means H9, a game ball other than a game ball entered at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to make the game ball enter the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means H9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means H9 is set so that "when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, it is opened and closed in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passed. The game machine according to any one of the means H1 to H8, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

In addition, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the means H9 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means H10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of means H1 to H9, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the means H10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation for the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means H11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means H11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means H12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H11, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the starting ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means H13. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means H1 to H12, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-described means H13, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem I. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

However, in such a pachinko machine, since the game ball is entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to continue shooting the game ball into the game area even after the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. be. In such a case, conventionally, since the variable ball entry means has already been opened, even if a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means at this timing, the opening opportunity etc. are not obtained, and the prize ball is awarded. was only Therefore, there is a possibility that the player's interest in the game may decline, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving the interest of players.

Means I1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine comprising movable body control means capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined action as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby making the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state.

In addition, when "a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means", for example, "a start ball that can detect the game ball entering the starting ball entry means detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery”.

According to the means I1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, a game ball is newly introduced into the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. When the ball hits the ball and satisfies a predetermined condition, the movable body is made to perform a predetermined action as an advantage that can be given, and control can be executed to set it in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, even during an open game state (during the period in which the variable ball entry means is open) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. Advantageous conditions can occur for players who play.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means I2. The movable body control means causes the movable body to perform the predetermined action when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state and a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to means I1, characterized in that it is constructed so as to be capable of executing the control to make the predetermined advantageous state.

Conventionally, in a pachinko machine, within a predetermined time from the time when the variable ball entry means is opened (or when the game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means which is in the open state), the variable ball entry It is set as a standby time (remaining ball monitoring period) for waiting for a game ball (remaining ball) that has entered the internal area of the means but has not yet been discharged to be detected by a predetermined detection switch.

Conventionally, however, when a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means during this remaining ball monitoring period, prize balls are paid out, but a lottery or the like based on the entered ball is not conducted. , the variable ball entry means is configured so as not to be in an open state.

On the other hand, according to the above-described means I2, even during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state (during the remaining ball monitoring period), the movable body is moved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action. As a result, the effect of the means I1 can be further enhanced.

Means I3. It is characterized in that the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) starts opening can be changed in a plurality of ways. The gaming machine according to means I1 or I2.

If the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the opening of the variable ball entering means is started is always constant, the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. At that time, the player easily grasps that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the opening timing of the variable ball entry means related to the starting ball entry, and the game ball is released at that time. There is a risk that some players will temporarily stop playing.

Further, when the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the opening of the variable ball entering means is always constant, the opening timing of the variable ball entering means is determined by the player. There is a risk that such actions as shooting a game ball can be easily performed in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the above means I3, the opening timing of the variable ball-entering means changes, and the variable ball-entering means does not always open at a constant timing, so that the game presentation related to the variable ball-entering means becomes monotonous. It is possible to suppress As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the release timing of the variable ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as shooting a game ball is performed in accordance with the opening timing of the variable ball entry means. In addition, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Means I4. a first display means for starting a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means and performing a stop display in a predetermined mode based on a lottery result of a predetermined open lottery process;
a first fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times according to the first display means;
a first variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the first variation pattern storage means based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; ,
A first display control means for controlling the first display means based on the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern selection means,
The opening/closing control means is
The game machine according to means I3, wherein the open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened after the stop display is made on the first display means can be executed.

According to the means I4, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the first display means can be made variable. By utilizing this, it is possible to make the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means until the opening of the variable ball entering means is started to be variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I3 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and simplification of control can be achieved.

Means I5. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof). with
The game machine according to any one of means I1 to I4, wherein the predetermined condition can be satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

If the movable body is configured to operate each time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the game ends), When the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the player easily understands that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the operation timing of the movable body related to the starting ball entering means. At that point, there is a risk that some players will temporarily stop shooting game balls.

According to the above means I5, every time a game ball enters the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the movable body does not operate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the presentation related to the movable body and increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means I6. The time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined motion of the movable body is started. The game machine according to any one of means I1 to I3, wherein (the time required for the movable body to reach the predetermined advantageous state) can be changed in a plurality of ways.

If the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the time from when the predetermined movement of the movable body is started is always constant. In this case, when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the operation timing of the movable body related to the starting ball entering means. There is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game balls at that point.

In addition, during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the predetermined operation of the movable body is started is always If it is fixed, the player will easily grasp the movement timing of the movable body, and there is a risk that an action such as shooting a game ball will be easily performed in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the means I6, since the movement timing of the movable body changes and the movable body does not always move at a fixed timing, the monotony of the game performance using the movable body is suppressed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as shooting a game ball will be performed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Means I7. The time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined motion of the movable body is started. out of a plurality of set times set in advance based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end) A gaming machine according to means I6, characterized by comprising set time selection means capable of selecting any one.

According to the means I7, the configuration related to the means I6 can be realized by relatively simple processing, and the control can be simplified.

Means I8. During the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end), a variable display is started based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, and the lottery result of the predetermined operation lottery process. a second display means for performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on
a second fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times according to the second display means;
A plurality of patterns stored in the second variation pattern storage means based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) A second variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the variation patterns of
A second display control means for controlling the second display means based on the variation pattern selected by the second variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means is
A gaming machine according to means I6, wherein control is executable to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is made on the second display means.

According to the means I8, by providing the second display means, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the movable body may enter a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player, while not knowing whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, has a sense of anticipation that it will be in an advantageous state, and watches the movement of the game ball and the variable display. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game presentation related to the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the means I8, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the second display means can be made variable. Utilizing this, during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end), from the game ball entering the starting ball entering means until the predetermined operation of the movable body is started can be made variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and simplification of control can be achieved.

Means I9. It is characterized in that the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the predetermined open game state (and/or the predetermined period after the end) is completed. A gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I8.

In a game machine configured so that a game ball can enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability by receiving the action (assist) of the movable body, during (and/or after) a predetermined open game state, At the time when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means (at the time of the operation assist lottery) during a predetermined period), the player's sense of expectation may fade and the interest may decrease when the game ball does not exist in the internal area. There is

On the other hand, according to the means I9, when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end), the game ball enters the internal area. Even if is not present, a game ball entering the variable ball entering means opened at a predetermined timing is given a chance of entering the special ball entering means with a higher probability.

As a result, the player can confirm that the game ball has entered the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end). It is possible to positively play the game to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means I10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of means I1 to I9, characterized in that it is constructed to facilitate.

According to the above means I10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means I11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above means I11, the determination of the type of the special game state is performed based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

In addition, for a game machine having a part or all of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the above means A1 to A11 and the above means B1 to B13 Configuration of any part or all, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, or means E1 to means E12 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means F1 to means F11, configuration of any part or all of the means G1 to means G12, the means H1 to means Any part or all of the configuration of H13 and at least one of the configurations of part or all of the above means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means B1 to B13, a configuration of any part or all of the means A1 to means A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to C12, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to D15, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means E1 to E12, a configuration of any part or all of the above means A1 to means A11 and the above means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means G1 to G12, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means H1 to H13, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means I1 to I11, a configuration of any part or all of the means A1 to A11 and the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A pinball game machine provided with a game area in which a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine having a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) that guides the game balls and extends along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation port, etc.), and configured to enable visual recognition of the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

(c) The game machine in each of the above means or each pinball game machine is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

10... Pachinko machine 30... Game board 32... Variable winning device 33a... First starting winning part 33b... Second starting winning part 37... Central winning unit 42... Effect display device 44... Special gate display Device 224a, 224b Start winning switch 261 Main control device 401 Internal area 404 Blade member 406 Route sorting area 407 Winner lottery area 408 Type lottery area 409 Accessory actuation lottery Area 410 Rotor unit 414 Rotor 427 1st V prize passage 437 Internal ball detection switch 461 First special ball detection switch 602 Drop passage 603 Route distribution member 604 ...Normal guide passage 605...Special guide passage 650...Special gate 651...Special gate switch 721...Bypass mechanism part 722...Movable accessories 731...15R entrance 732...7R entrance 733... 3R ball entrance, 741... type sorting mechanism, 737... bypass passage, 738... second special ball detection switch.

Claims (1)

a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter;
a special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball is entered in the special ball entry means, the gaming machine comprising:
a first trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter;
a second trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific region can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means and cannot flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific region can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means and cannot flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
It is possible to flow down to the special ball entry means by changing the state in the internal area of the variable ball entry means between at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. a variable means capable of changing the value of the game ball flowing down a predetermined route,
The variable means, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means, a predetermined configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
This game machine is
When the predetermined switching condition is established, the value of the game ball flowing down the predetermined route is changed by the variable means,
The specific area is provided only at one location through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided only at one place,
In the specific area, while allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction, a regulation means is provided that regulates the passage of the game ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction,
A game ball that has entered the first ball-entering means and the second ball-entering means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball-entering means after that,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the special game state is granted by being controlled to the advantageous state by the variable means, the predetermined type of game most advantageous to the player is given, rather than being controlled to the non-advantageous state by the variable means. It has a structure that makes it easy to determine the special game state,
When the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the second trigger ball entering means, the variable A gaming machine characterized in that it has a configuration capable of changing the value of a game ball that has flowed down due to the action of the means .

Images